You are on page 1of 458

SYSTEM INSTALLATION

MANUAL

GNS-XLS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

MANUAL NUMBER 006-10528-0000


REVISION 9 NOVEMBER, 2005
THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE CONTROLLED BY THE U.S. DEPARTMENT OF STATE INTER-
NATIONAL TRAFFIC IN ARMS REGULATIONS (ITAR) 22 CFR 120-130 OR THE U.S.
DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE EXPORT ADMINISTRATION REGULATIONS (EAR), AND
MAY NOT BE EXPORTED OUT OF THE UNITED STATE OR BE PROVIDED TO FOREIGN
PERSONS (AS DEFINED BY THE ITAR) LOCATED WITHIN THE UNITED STATES, WITHOUT
THE APPROPRIATE PRIOR AUTHORIZATIONS FROM THE U.S. GOVERNMENT. DIVER-
SION CONTRARY TO U.S. EXPORT LAWS AND REGULATIONS IS PROHIBITED.

COPYRIGHT NOTICE

©1995-1998, 2000-2001, 2005 Honeywell International Inc.

REPRODUCTION OF THIS PUBLICATION OR ANY PORTION THEREOF BY ANY MEANS


WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF HONEYWELL IS PROHIBITED,
EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION OR MAINTENANCE OF THE
RECIPIENT’S EQUIPMENT. FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT THE MANAGER,
TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS, HONEYWELL, ONE TECHNOLOGY CENTER, 23500 WEST
105th STREET OLATHE KS 66061 TELEPHONE: (913) 712-0400.
J GNS-XLS

REVISION HISTORY
GNS-XLS

System Installation Manual, Part Number: 006-10528-XXXX

For each revision, add, delete, or replace as indicated.

Revision 9, Nov/2005

ITEM ACTION
Full Reprint Replaces all previous revisions.

Revision 9 converts the manual from Interleaf to Adobe FrameMaker. All pages are fully revised
and reformatted. Specific changes are denoted by revision bar.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page RH-1


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page RH-2


J GNS-XLS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
ITEM PAGE

SECTION I
GENERAL INFORMATION
1.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1 APPLICABILITY OF THE SYSTEM MANUAL ............................................................. 1-1
1.1.1 EQUIPMENT APPLICABILITY....................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION............................................................................................... 1-1
1.2.1 GNS-XLS SYSTEM........................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2.2 FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT...................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.3 DATABASE .................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.4 ARINC INTERFACES .................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.5 VLF/OMEGA .................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.3 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS ............................................................................... 1-3
1.4 UNITS AND ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED ..................................................................... 1-6
1.4.1 GNS-XLS CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT ........................................................................... 1-6
1.4.2 CONFIGURATION MODULE......................................................................................... 1-9
1.4.3 GPS ANTENNAS ......................................................................................................... 1-10
1.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED............................................................. 1-11
1.5.1 CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT INSTALLATION KIT......................................................... 1-11
1.5.2 GPS ANTENNA CONNECTOR ................................................................................... 1-12
1.5.3 GLOBAL GPS ANTENNA INSTALLATION SPARE PARTS ....................................... 1-13
1.5.4 KA 91 GPS Antenna Installation Kit ............................................................................. 1-13
1.5.5 KA 92 GPS ANTENNA INSTALLATION KIT ............................................................... 1-13
1.6 ACCESSORIES REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED ................................................... 1-14
1.7 LICENSE REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................ 1-15
1.8 INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTINUED AIRWORTHINESS............................................ 1-15
1.9 SUGGESTED MAINTENANCE ................................................................................... 1-15

SECTION II
INSTALLATION
2.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING EQUIPMENT ........................................................... 2-1
2.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION ...................................................................................... 2-1

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-1


J GNS-XLS

ITEM PAGE

2.2.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................... 2-1


2.2.2 AVIONICS COOLING REQUIREMENTS FOR PANEL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT ....... 2-2
2.2.3 CDU INSTALLATION..................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.4 CONFIGURATION MODULE INSTALLATION .............................................................. 2-3
2.2.5 ARNAV REMOTE PROCESSING UNIT INSTALLATION ............................................. 2-3
2.2.6 GPS ANTENNA INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS ................................................. 2-4
2.2.7 GPS ANTENNA INSTALLATION................................................................................... 2-5

SECTION III
SYSTEM PLANNING
3.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 3-1
3.0.1 SHIELD TERMINATION ................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1 GENERAL INTERCONNECT INFORMATION.............................................................. 3-7
3.1.1 MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACES ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS....................... 3-7
3.2 CONFIGURATION MODULE INTERFACE................................................................. 3-13
3.3 POSITION UNIT INTERFACE ..................................................................................... 3-17
3.3.1 ARINC 743A GPS INPUT ........................................................................................... 3-17
3.4 GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM.............................................................................. 3-19
3.4.1 GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM FUNCTION........................................................... 3-19
3.4.2 INTERNAL GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM............................................................ 3-19
3.4.3 INTERNAL GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM CONNECTIONS ................................ 3-19
3.5 ANNUNCIATOR FUNCTIONS .................................................................................... 3-21
3.5.1 ANNUNCIATOR REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS............................................. 3-21
3.5.2 ANNUNCIATOR ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS................................................. 3-21
3.5.3 ANNUNCIATOR TEST................................................................................................. 3-22
3.5.4 NAV AUTOTUNE ANNUNCIATOR.............................................................................. 3-22
3.6 FUEL FLOW ................................................................................................................ 3-23
3.6.1 FREQUENCY TYPE .................................................................................................... 3-23
3.6.2 PULSE WIDTH TYPE .................................................................................................. 3-24
3.6.3 ANALOG DC TYPE...................................................................................................... 3-25
3.6.4 ANALOG AC TYPE...................................................................................................... 3-27
3.7 RADIO INTERFACE .................................................................................................... 3-37
3.7.1 RADIO TUNE OUTPUTS............................................................................................. 3-37
3.7.2 RADIO TUNE DATA .................................................................................................... 3-38
3.7.3 RADIO TUNE VALID.................................................................................................... 3-41
3.7.4 AUTOTUNE FEATURE................................................................................................ 3-41

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-2


J GNS-XLS

ITEM PAGE

3.7.5 VOR BEARING INPUTS .............................................................................................. 3-42


3.7.6 VOR/LOC SUPER FLAGS........................................................................................... 3-43
3.7.7 DME SLANT RANGE INPUTS..................................................................................... 3-44
3.7.8 DME VALID FLAG INPUTS ......................................................................................... 3-45
3.8 ALTITUDE INTERFACE.............................................................................................. 3-55
3.8.1 ARINC 565 TWO SPEED SYNCHRO ......................................................................... 3-55
3.8.2 COARSE DC/FINE RESOLVER .................................................................................. 3-56
3.8.3 ALTITUDE VALID FLAG INPUT .................................................................................. 3-57
3.9 VNAV INTERFACE...................................................................................................... 3-63
3.9.1 ANALOG ALTITUDE ERROR INPUT .......................................................................... 3-63
3.9.2 ALTITUDE ERROR VALID .......................................................................................... 3-63
3.9.3 ANALOG ALTITUDE RATE ......................................................................................... 3-64
3.9.4 VERTICAL DEVIATION OUTPUT ............................................................................... 3-64
3.9.5 VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID FLAG OUTPUT.......................................................... 3-64
3.10 TRUE AIRSPEED INTERFACE .................................................................................. 3-67
3.10.1 TAS SYNCHRO - ARINC 545...................................................................................... 3-67
3.10.2 TAS AC - ARINC 565, OUTPUT NO. 1........................................................................ 3-67
3.10.3 TAS DC - ARINC 565, OUTPUT NO. 4 ....................................................................... 3-68
3.10.4 TAS VALID FLAG INPUT............................................................................................. 3-68
3.11 MAGNETIC HEADING INTERFACE........................................................................... 3-75
3.11.1 SYNCHRO HEADING INPUT ...................................................................................... 3-75
3.11.2 HEADING VALID FLAG INPUT ................................................................................... 3-75
3.12 HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR INTERFACE............................................... 3-79
3.12.1 BEARING OUTPUTS................................................................................................... 3-79
3.12.2 COURSE OUTPUTS.................................................................................................... 3-79
3.12.3 CROSS TRACK DEVIATION OUTPUT ....................................................................... 3-80
3.12.4 TO/FROM FLAG OUTPUT .......................................................................................... 3-81
3.12.5 HSI VALID FLAG OUTPUT (NAV WARN)................................................................... 3-81
3.12.6 SELECTED CROSS TRACK WARN ........................................................................... 3-81
3.13 COLLINS EFIS-85 INTERFACE.................................................................................. 3-89
3.14 AFIS INTERFACE ....................................................................................................... 3-93
3.14.1 AFIS ON CONTROL .................................................................................................... 3-93
3.14.2 AFIS WEATHER GRAPHICS ...................................................................................... 3-93
3.15 AUTOPILOT INTERFACE......................................................................................... 3-103
3.15.1 ROLL STEERING AC OUTPUT................................................................................. 3-103
3.15.2 ROLL STEERING VALID ........................................................................................... 3-103

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-3


J GNS-XLS

ITEM PAGE

3.16 INTRA-SYSTEM INTERFACE................................................................................... 3-107


3.17 GAMA ARINC 429 INTERFACE ............................................................................... 3-111
3.17.1 HIGH SPEED BUS..................................................................................................... 3-111
3.17.2 LOW SPEED BUS ..................................................................................................... 3-114
3.17.3 BAE 146 EFIS CONFIGURATION-HIGH SPEED BUS ............................................. 3-117
3.18 ARINC 571/575/706/IC-600 INPUT ........................................................................... 3-121
3.18.1 INS/WEATHER RADAR INTERFACE ....................................................................... 3-121
3.18.2 AIR DATA COMPUTER INTERFACE........................................................................ 3-122
3.18.3 CONCENTRATED ARINC 429 INPUT ...................................................................... 3-124
3.19 ARINC 561 SERIAL OUTPUT................................................................................... 3-129
3.20 ARINC 571 SERIAL OUTPUT................................................................................... 3-135
3.21 EGPWS INTERFACE ................................................................................................ 3-141
3.22 SEARCH AND RESCUE CAPABILITIES ................................................................. 3-147
3.22.1 MARK-ON-TARGET DISCRETE INPUT ................................................................... 3-147

SECTION IV
POST INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION AND CHECK OUT
4.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE (-0101, -0102)................................................................ 4-1
4.2 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE (-0101, -0102) ......................................................... 4-2
4.2.1 NO CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED ........................................................... 4-5
4.2.2 CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED (CDB WOG)........................................... 4-36
4.2.3 CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED (DISCRETE WOG) ................................ 4-64
4.3 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE (-0203)......................................................................... 4-94
4.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE (-0203) .................................................................. 4-95
4.4.1 NO CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED ......................................................... 4-98
4.4.2 CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED (CDB WOG)......................................... 4-132
4.4.3 CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED (DISCRETE WOG) .............................. 4-161
4.5 POST INSTALLATION CHECKOUT PROCEDURE................................................. 4-192
4.5.1 SET-UP ...................................................................................................................... 4-192
4.5.2 TESTING DISPLAY INPUTS ..................................................................................... 4-193
4.5.3 TESTING OUTPUTS ................................................................................................. 4-199
4.5.4 GPS STATUS CHECKOUT ....................................................................................... 4-207
4.5.5 GPS INTERFERENCE CHECKOUT ......................................................................... 4-209

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-4


J GNS-XLS

ITEM PAGE

SECTION V
CERTIFICATION
5.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 4-1
5.1 CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE ................................................................................... 4-1
5.1.1 EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY ..................................................................................... 4-1
5.1.2 EQUIPMENT LOCATION .............................................................................................. 4-1
5.1.3 FAA REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................. 4-1
5.1.4 Flight Test ...................................................................................................................... 4-1
5.1.5 FAA FORM 337.............................................................................................................. 4-1
5.1.6 FLIGHT MANUAL REVISION ........................................................................................ 4-2
5.1.7 PILOT BRIEFING........................................................................................................... 4-2
5.2 FLIGHT TESTS.............................................................................................................. 4-2
5.2.1 IFR APPROVAL ............................................................................................................. 4-2

SECTION VI
OPERATION
6.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 6-1

CERTIFICATION APPENDIX

FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT APPENDIX

STC APPENDIX

TSO APPENDIX

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-5


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-6


J GNS-XLS

ITEM PAGE

FIGURE 1-1 GNS-XLS Configuration Chart (-010X) ........................................................ 1-6


FIGURE 1-2 GNS-XLS Configuration Chart (-0203) ......................................................... 1-8
FIGURE 2-1 GNS-XLS Viewing Limitations ...................................................................... 2-2
FIGURE 2-2 GPS Antenna Preferred Location ................................................................. 2-4
FIGURE 2-3 GNS-XLS Outline and Mounting Drawing .................................................... 2-7
FIGURE 2-4 CDU Instrument Panel Mounting Provision Drawing.................................... 2-9
FIGURE 2-5 Configuration Module Outline and Mounting Drawing ................................ 2-11
FIGURE 2-6 Global Low Gain GPS Antenna Outline and Mounting Drawing ................ 2-13
FIGURE 2-7 Global High Gain GPS Antenna Outline and Mounting Drawing................ 2-15
FIGURE 2-8 KA 91 GPS Antenna Outline and Mounting Drawing ................................. 2-17
FIGURE 2-9 KA 91 GPS Antenna Drawing .................................................................... 2-19
FIGURE 2-10 KA 91 GPS Antenna Backplate Outline Drawing ....................................... 2-21
FIGURE 2-11 KA 92 GPS Antenna Outline and Mounting Drawing ................................. 2-23
FIGURE 2-12 KA 92 GPS Antenna Drawing .................................................................... 2-25
FIGURE 2-13 KA 92 GPS Antenna Backplate Outline Drawing ....................................... 2-31
FIGURE 3-1 GNS-XLS System Block Diagram ................................................................ 3-3
FIGURE 3-2 GNS-XLS Dual System Block Diagram ........................................................ 3-5
FIGURE 3-3 GNS-XLS General System Interconnect .................................................... 3-11
FIGURE 3-4 GNS-XLS Configuration Module Interface ................................................. 3-15
FIGURE 3-5 Frequency Type Fuel Flow Systems .......................................................... 3-24
FIGURE 3-6 ELDEC Range/Scaling ............................................................................... 3-25
FIGURE 3-7 Analog DC Range/Scaling.......................................................................... 3-27
FIGURE 3-8 Analog AC Range/Scaling .......................................................................... 3-27
FIGURE 3-9 GNS-XLS Fuel Flow Interconnect .............................................................. 3-29
FIGURE 3-10 GNS-XLS Radio Interconnect .................................................................... 3-47
FIGURE 3-11 GNS-XLS Altitude Interconnect .................................................................. 3-59
FIGURE 3-12 GNS-XLS VNAV Interconnect .................................................................... 3-65
FIGURE 3-13 GNS-XLS True Airspeed Interconnect (ARINC 545).................................. 3-69
FIGURE 3-14 GNS-XLS Magnetic Heading Interconnect ................................................. 3-77
FIGURE 3-15 GNS-XLS Horizontal Situation Indicator Interconnect ................................ 3-83
FIGURE 3-16 GNS-XLS with Collins EFIS-85 Interconnect ............................................. 3-91
FIGURE 3-17 GNS-XLS AFIS Interconnect ...................................................................... 3-99
FIGURE 3-18 DMU to ARNAV RPU, and GNS-XLS Interconnect................................. 3-101
FIGURE 3-19 GNS-XLS Autopilot Interconnect .............................................................. 3-105
FIGURE 3-20 GNS-XLS Intra-System Interconnect ....................................................... 3-109
FIGURE 3-21 GNS-XLS GAMA 429 Interconnect .......................................................... 3-119
FIGURE 3-22 ARINC 571 Digital Input Chart ................................................................. 3-121
FIGURE 3-23 GNS-XLS ARINC 571/575/706/IC-600 Interconnect ................................ 3-127
FIGURE 3-24 GNS-XLS ARINC 561 Serial Output Interconnect.................................... 3-133
FIGURE 3-25 ARINC 571 Digital Output Chart............................................................... 3-135
FIGURE 3-26 GNS-XLS ARINC 571 Serial Output Interconnect.................................... 3-139
FIGURE 3-27 Single GNS--XLS to EGPWS Interconnect .............................................. 3-143
FIGURE 3-28 Dual GNS-XLS to EGPWS Interconnect .................................................. 3-145
FIGURE 3-29 Mark-On-Target Discrete Input................................................................. 3-147
FIGURE 3-30 GNS-XLS CDU Connector (J101) ............................................................ 3-149
FIGURE 3-31 Configuration Module Pinout .................................................................... 3-157
FIGURE 4-1 SELF TEST PAGE ....................................................................................... 4-1
FIGURE 4-2 INITIALIZATION PAGE ................................................................................ 4-1
FIGURE 4-3 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE....................................................................... 4-2

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-7


J GNS-XLS

ITEM PAGE

FIGURE 4-4 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE....................................................................... 4-2


FIGURE 4-5 READ/CHANGE CONFIGURATION OF: PAGE .......................................... 4-3
FIGURE 4-6 CONFIGURATION DISPLAY FORMAT PAGE ............................................ 4-3
FIGURE 4-7 CONFIGURATION CODE PAGE ................................................................. 4-4
FIGURE 4-8 AFIS INSTALLED? PAGE ............................................................................ 4-4
FIGURE 4-9 CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED PAGE ..................................... 4-5
FIGURE 4-10 THIS FMS IS: PAGE .................................................................................... 4-5
FIGURE 4-11 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE ..................................................................... 4-5
FIGURE 4-12 POSITION UNIT #1 RPU ANTENNA TYPE PAGE...................................... 4-6
FIGURE 4-13 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE (OPTION 2).................... 4-6
FIGURE 4-14 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE (OPTION 3).................... 4-7
FIGURE 4-15 POSITION UNIT #1 IS PAGE ...................................................................... 4-7
FIGURE 4-16 POSITION UNIT #2 IS PAGE ...................................................................... 4-7
FIGURE 4-17 COMPASS HEADING PAGE ....................................................................... 4-8
FIGURE 4-18 TAS INTERFACE PAGE .............................................................................. 4-8
FIGURE 4-19 ALT. INTERFACE PAGE ............................................................................. 4-9
FIGURE 4-20 ALT. RATE INTRF PAGE............................................................................. 4-9
FIGURE 4-21 DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE........................................................................... 4-10
FIGURE 4-22 WEIGHT ON GEAR PAGE ........................................................................ 4-10
FIGURE 4-23 ALT. PRESELECTOR INTERFACE TYPE PAGE ..................................... 4-11
FIGURE 4-24 ALT. PRESELECTOR SCALING PAGE .................................................... 4-11
FIGURE 4-25 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE................................................ 4-11
FIGURE 4-26 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE ............................................. 4-12
FIGURE 4-27 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE .................................................. 4-12
FIGURE 4-28 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE ......................................................................... 4-12
FIGURE 4-29 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE ...................................................................... 4-13
FIGURE 4-30 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE ................................................................... 4-13
FIGURE 4-31 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE ............................................................................. 4-13
FIGURE 4-32A EFIS DME ARC STYLE PAGE .................................................................. 4-14
FIGURE 4-32B DME ARC STYLE PAGE ........................................................................... 4-14
FIGURE 4-33 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE..................................... 4-15
FIGURE 4-34 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE ....................................................... 4-15
FIGURE 4-35 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO PAGE ............................................. 4-15
FIGURE 4-36 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS PAGE ...................................................... 4-16
FIGURE 4-37 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE...................................................................... 4-16
FIGURE 4-38 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS PAGE ....................................................... 4-16
FIGURE 4-39 SIMULATOR MODE PAGE........................................................................ 4-17
FIGURE 4-40 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE..................................... 4-17
FIGURE 4-41A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1 ........................................................... 4-18
FIGURE 4-41B FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2 ........................................................... 4-18
FIGURE 4-42A FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1.............................................. 4-19
FIGURE 4-42B FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 2.............................................. 4-19
FIGURE 4-42C FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3.............................................. 4-19
FIGURE 4-43A PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1 ........................................... 4-20
FIGURE 4-43B PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 2 ........................................... 4-20
FIGURE 4-43C PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3 ........................................... 4-20
FIGURE 4-44A DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1............................................ 4-21
FIGURE 4-44B DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 2............................................ 4-21
FIGURE 4-44C DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 3............................................ 4-21

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-8


J GNS-XLS

ITEM PAGE

FIGURE 4-44D DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 4............................................ 4-22


FIGURE 4-44E DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 5............................................ 4-22
FIGURE 4-44F DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 6............................................ 4-22
FIGURE 4-44G DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 7............................................ 4-23
FIGURE 4-44H DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8............................................ 4-23
FIGURE 4-44I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT ................................................................ 4-23
FIGURE 4-45 AC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE ............................................... 4-24
FIGURE 4-46 DC COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE.................................... 4-24
FIGURE 4-47 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE ........................................................................... 4-25
FIGURE 4-48 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE ............................................... 4-25
FIGURE 4-49A RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 1 ........................... 4-26
FIGURE 4-49B RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 2 ........................... 4-26
FIGURE 4-49C RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 3 ........................... 4-26
FIGURE 4-49D RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 4 ........................... 4-27
FIGURE 4-49E RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 5 ........................... 4-27
FIGURE 4-50 AUTOTUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE PAGE ............................................ 4-27
FIGURE 4-51 AUTOTUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF: PAGE................................... 4-28
FIGURE 4-52 AUTOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF: PAGE ................................. 4-28
FIGURE 4-53 VOR BEARING PAGE ............................................................................... 4-28
FIGURE 4-54 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE ....................................................................... 4-29
FIGURE 4-55A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE ....................................................................... 4-29
FIGURE 4-55B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS PAGE ............................................................... 4-30
FIGURE 4-56 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................... 4-30
FIGURE 4-57 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................... 4-30
FIGURE 4-58 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE................................................ 4-31
FIGURE 4-59 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................... 4-31
FIGURE 4-60 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE .................................................................. 4-31
FIGURE 4-61 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE .................................................................. 4-32
FIGURE 4-62 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE........................................................................ 4-32
FIGURE 4-63 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE........................................................................ 4-32
FIGURE 4-64 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT PAGE .................................... 4-33
FIGURE 4-65 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT PAGE.......................................... 4-33
FIGURE 4-66A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE ..................................................................... 4-34
FIGURE 4-66B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMITING PAGE..................................................... 4-34
FIGURE 4-66C HIGH ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE ................................................................... 4-35
FIGURE 4-67 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE .................................................. 4-35
FIGURE 4-68 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE ............................................ 4-36
FIGURE 4-69 THIS FMS IS: PAGE .................................................................................. 4-36
FIGURE 4-70 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE ................................................................... 4-37
FIGURE 4-71 POSITION UNIT #1 RPU ANTENNA TYPE PAGE.................................... 4-37
FIGURE 4-72 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE...................................... 4-38
FIGURE 4-73 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: (OPTION 3) PAGE.................. 4-38
FIGURE 4-74 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE ................................................................... 4-38
FIGURE 4-75 POSITION UNIT #2 IS: PAGE ................................................................... 4-39
FIGURE 4-76 DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE........................................................................... 4-39
FIGURE 4-77 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE................................................ 4-39
FIGURE 4-78 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE ............................................. 4-40
FIGURE 4-79 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE .................................................. 4-40
FIGURE 4-80 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE ......................................................................... 4-40

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-9


J GNS-XLS

ITEM PAGE

FIGURE 4-81 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE ...................................................................... 4-41


FIGURE 4-82 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE ................................................................... 4-41
FIGURE 4-83 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE ............................................................................. 4-41
FIGURE 4-84A EFIS DME ARC STYLE PAGE .................................................................. 4-42
FIGURE 4-84B DME ARC STYLE PAGE ........................................................................... 4-42
FIGURE 4-85 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO PAGE...................................... 4-43
FIGURE 4-86 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE ....................................................... 4-43
FIGURE 4-87 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE ............................................ 4-43
FIGURE 4-88 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS: PAGE ..................................................... 4-44
FIGURE 4-89 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE...................................................................... 4-44
FIGURE 4-90 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS: PAGE ...................................................... 4-44
FIGURE 4-91 SIMULATOR MODE PAGE........................................................................ 4-45
FIGURE 4-92 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE..................................... 4-45
FIGURE 4-93A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1 ........................................................... 4-46
FIGURE 4-93B FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2 ........................................................... 4-46
FIGURE 4-94A FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1.............................................. 4-47
FIGURE 4-94B FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 2.............................................. 4-47
FIGURE 4-94C FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3.............................................. 4-47
FIGURE 4-95A PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1 ........................................... 4-48
FIGURE 4-95B PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 2 ........................................... 4-48
FIGURE 4-95C PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3 ........................................... 4-48
FIGURE 4-96A DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1............................................ 4-49
FIGURE 4-96B DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 2............................................ 4-49
FIGURE 4-96C DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 3............................................ 4-49
FIGURE 4-96D DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 4............................................ 4-50
FIGURE 4-96E DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 5............................................ 4-50
FIGURE 4-96F DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 6............................................ 4-50
FIGURE 4-96G DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 7............................................ 4-51
FIGURE 4-96H DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8............................................ 4-51
FIGURE 4-96I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT PAGE ..................................................... 4-51
FIGURE 4-97 AC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE ............................................... 4-52
FIGURE 4-98 DC COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE.................................... 4-52
FIGURE 4-99 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE ........................................................................... 4-53
FIGURE 4-100 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE ............................................... 4-53
FIGURE 4-101A RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE .............................. 4-54
FIGURE 4-101B RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE .............................. 4-54
FIGURE 4-101C RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE .............................. 4-54
FIGURE 4-101D RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE .............................. 4-55
FIGURE 4-101E RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE .............................. 4-55
FIGURE 4-102 AUTOTUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE PAGE ............................................ 4-55
FIGURE 4-103 AUTOTUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF: PAGE................................... 4-56
FIGURE 4-104 AUTOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF: PAGE ................................. 4-56
FIGURE 4-105 VOR BEARING PAGE ............................................................................... 4-56
FIGURE 4-106 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE ....................................................................... 4-57
FIGURE 4-107A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE ....................................................................... 4-57
FIGURE 4-107B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS PAGE ............................................................... 4-58
FIGURE 4-108 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................... 4-58
FIGURE 4-109 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................... 4-58
FIGURE 4-110 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE................................................ 4-59

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-10


J GNS-XLS

ITEM PAGE

FIGURE 4-111 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................... 4-59


FIGURE 4-112 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE .................................................................. 4-59
FIGURE 4-113 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE .................................................................. 4-60
FIGURE 4-114 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE........................................................................ 4-60
FIGURE 4-115 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE........................................................................ 4-60
FIGURE 4-116 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT. PAGE .................................. 4-61
FIGURE 4-117 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT. PAGE......................................... 4-61
FIGURE 4-118A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE ..................................................................... 4-62
FIGURE 4-118B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMITING PAGE..................................................... 4-62
FIGURE 4-118C HIGH ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE ................................................................... 4-63
FIGURE 4-119 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE .................................................. 4-63
FIGURE 4-120 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE ............................................ 4-64
FIGURE 4-121 THIS FMS IS: PAGE .................................................................................. 4-64
FIGURE 4-122 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE ................................................................... 4-65
FIGURE 4-123 POSITION UNIT #1 RPU ANTENNA TYPE PAGE.................................... 4-65
FIGURE 4-124 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE...................................... 4-66
FIGURE 4-125 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: (OPTION 3) PAGE.................. 4-66
FIGURE 4-126 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE ................................................................... 4-66
FIGURE 4-127 POSITION UNIT #2 IS: PAGE ................................................................... 4-67
FIGURE 4-128 DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE........................................................................... 4-67
FIGURE 4-129 WEIGHT ON GEAR PAGE ........................................................................ 4-68
FIGURE 4-130 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE................................................ 4-68
FIGURE 4-131 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE ............................................. 4-68
FIGURE 4-132 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE .................................................. 4-69
FIGURE 4-133 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE ......................................................................... 4-69
FIGURE 4-134 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE ...................................................................... 4-69
FIGURE 4-135 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE ................................................................... 4-70
FIGURE 4-136 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE ............................................................................. 4-70
FIGURE 4-137A EFIS DME ARC STYLE PAGE .................................................................. 4-70
FIGURE 4-137B DME ARC STYLE PAGE ........................................................................... 4-71
FIGURE 4-138 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE..................................... 4-71
FIGURE 4-139 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE ....................................................... 4-72
FIGURE 4-140 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE ............................................ 4-72
FIGURE 4-141 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS: PAGE ..................................................... 4-72
FIGURE 4-142 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE...................................................................... 4-73
FIGURE 4-143 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS: PAGE ...................................................... 4-73
FIGURE 4-144 SIMULATOR MODE PAGE........................................................................ 4-73
FIGURE 4-145 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE..................................... 4-74
FIGURE 4-146A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1 ........................................................... 4-74
FIGURE 4-146B FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2 ........................................................... 4-75
FIGURE 4-147A FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1.............................................. 4-75
FIGURE 4-147B FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 2.............................................. 4-76
FIGURE 4-147C FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3.............................................. 4-76
FIGURE 4-148A PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1 ........................................... 4-76
FIGURE 4-148B PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 2 ........................................... 4-77
FIGURE 4-148C PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3 ........................................... 4-77
FIGURE 4-149A DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1............................................ 4-77
FIGURE 4-149B DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 2............................................ 4-78
FIGURE 4-149C DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 3............................................ 4-78

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-11


J GNS-XLS

ITEM PAGE

FIGURE 4-149D DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 4............................................ 4-78


FIGURE 4-149E DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 5............................................ 4-79
FIGURE 4-149F DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 6............................................ 4-79
FIGURE 4-149G DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 7............................................ 4-79
FIGURE 4-149H DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8............................................ 4-80
FIGURE 4-149I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT ................................................................ 4-80
FIGURE 4-150 AC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE ............................................... 4-81
FIGURE 4-151 DC COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE.................................... 4-81
FIGURE 4-152 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE ........................................................................... 4-82
FIGURE 4-153 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE ............................................... 4-82
FIGURE 4-154A RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 1 ........................... 4-83
FIGURE 4-154B RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 2 ........................... 4-83
FIGURE 4-154C RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 3 ........................... 4-83
FIGURE 4-154D RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 4 ........................... 4-84
FIGURE 4-154E RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 5 ........................... 4-84
FIGURE 4-155 AUTOTUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE ....................................................... 4-84
FIGURE 4-156 AUTOTUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF: PAGE................................... 4-85
FIGURE 4-157 AUTOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF PAGE .................................. 4-85
FIGURE 4-158 VOR BEARING: PAGE .............................................................................. 4-85
FIGURE 4-159 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE ....................................................................... 4-86
FIGURE 4-160A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE ....................................................................... 4-86
FIGURE 4-160B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS PAGE ............................................................... 4-87
FIGURE 4-161 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................... 4-87
FIGURE 4-162 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................... 4-87
FIGURE 4-163 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE................................................ 4-88
FIGURE 4-164 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................... 4-88
FIGURE 4-165 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE .................................................................. 4-88
FIGURE 4-166 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE .................................................................. 4-89
FIGURE 4-167 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE........................................................................ 4-89
FIGURE 4-168 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE........................................................................ 4-89
FIGURE 4-169 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT PAGE .................................... 4-90
FIGURE 4-170 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT PAGE.......................................... 4-90
FIGURE 4-171A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE ..................................................................... 4-91
FIGURE 4-171B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMITING PAGE..................................................... 4-91
FIGURE 4-171C HIGH ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE ................................................................... 4-92
FIGURE 4-172 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE .................................................. 4-92
FIGURE 4-173 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE ............................................ 4-93
FIGURE 4-201 SELF TEST PAGE ..................................................................................... 4-94
FIGURE 4-202 INITIALIZATION PAGE .............................................................................. 4-94
FIGURE 4-203 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE..................................................................... 4-95
FIGURE 4-204 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE..................................................................... 4-95
FIGURE 4-205 READ/CHANGE CONFIGURATION OF PAGE ......................................... 4-96
FIGURE 4-206 CONFIGURATION DISPLAY FORMAT PAGE .......................................... 4-96
FIGURE 4-207 CONFIGURATION CODE PAGE ............................................................... 4-97
FIGURE 4-208 AFIS INSTALLED? PAGE .......................................................................... 4-97
FIGURE 4-209 CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED PAGE ................................... 4-98
FIGURE 4-210 THIS FMS IS: PAGE .................................................................................. 4-98
FIGURE 4-211 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE ................................................................... 4-99
FIGURE 4-212 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE...................................... 4-99

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-12


J GNS-XLS

ITEM PAGE

FIGURE 4-213 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE ................................................................. 4-100


FIGURE 4-214 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE.................................... 4-100
FIGURE 4-215 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE ................................................................. 4-101
FIGURE 4-216 POSITION UNIT #2 IS: PAGE ................................................................. 4-101
FIGURE 4-217 COMPASS HEADING PAGE ................................................................... 4-102
FIGURE 4-218 TAS INTERFACE PAGE .......................................................................... 4-102
FIGURE 4-219 ALT. INTERFACE PAGE ......................................................................... 4-103
FIGURE 4-220 ALT. RATE INTRF. PAGE........................................................................ 4-103
FIGURE 4-221 DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE......................................................................... 4-104
FIGURE 4-222 WEIGHT ON GEAR PAGE ...................................................................... 4-104
FIGURE 4-223 ALT. PRESELECTOR INTERFACE TYPE PAGE ................................... 4-105
FIGURE 4-224 ALT. PRESELECTOR SCALING PAGE .................................................. 4-105
FIGURE 4-225 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE.............................................. 4-105
FIGURE 4-226 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE ........................................... 4-106
FIGURE 4-227 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE ................................................ 4-106
FIGURE 4-228 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE ....................................................................... 4-106
FIGURE 4-229 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE .................................................................... 4-107
FIGURE 4-230 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE ................................................................. 4-107
FIGURE 4-231 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE ........................................................................... 4-107
FIGURE 4-232A EFIS DME ARC STYLE PAGE ................................................................ 4-108
FIGURE 4-232B DME ARC STYLE PAGE ......................................................................... 4-108
FIGURE 4-233 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE................................... 4-109
FIGURE 4-234 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE ..................................................... 4-109
FIGURE 4-235 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE .......................................... 4-109
FIGURE 4-236 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS: PAGE ................................................... 4-110
FIGURE 4-237 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE.................................................................... 4-110
FIGURE 4-238 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS: PAGE .................................................... 4-110
FIGURE 4-239 SIMULATOR MODE PAGE...................................................................... 4-111
FIGURE 4-240 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE................................... 4-111
FIGURE 4-241A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1 ......................................................... 4-112
FIGURE 4-241B FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2 ......................................................... 4-112
FIGURE 4-242A FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1............................................ 4-113
FIGURE 4-242B FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 2............................................ 4-113
FIGURE 4-242C FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3............................................ 4-113
FIGURE 4-243A PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1 ......................................... 4-114
FIGURE 4-243B PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 2 ......................................... 4-114
FIGURE 4-243C PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3 ......................................... 4-114
FIGURE 4-244A DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1.......................................... 4-115
FIGURE 4-244B DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 2.......................................... 4-115
FIGURE 4-244C DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 3.......................................... 4-115
FIGURE 4-244D DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 4.......................................... 4-116
FIGURE 4-244E DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 5.......................................... 4-116
FIGURE 4-244F DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 6.......................................... 4-116
FIGURE 4-244G DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 7.......................................... 4-117
FIGURE 4-244H DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8.......................................... 4-117
FIGURE 4-244I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT .............................................................. 4-117
FIGURE 4-245 AC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE ............................................. 4-118
FIGURE 4-246 DC COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE.................................. 4-118
FIGURE 4-247 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE ......................................................................... 4-119

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-13


J GNS-XLS

ITEM PAGE

FIGURE 4-248 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE ............................................. 4-119


FIGURE 4-249A RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 1 ......................... 4-120
FIGURE 4-249B RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 2 ......................... 4-120
FIGURE 4-249C RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 3 ......................... 4-120
FIGURE 4-249D RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 4 ......................... 4-121
FIGURE 4-249E RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 5 ......................... 4-121
FIGURE 4-250 AUTOTUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE PAGE .......................................... 4-121
FIGURE 4-251 AUTOTUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF: PAGE................................. 4-122
FIGURE 4-252 AUTOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF: PAGE ............................... 4-122
FIGURE 4-253 VOR BEARING PAGE ............................................................................. 4-122
FIGURE 4-254 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE ..................................................................... 4-123
FIGURE 4-255A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE ..................................................................... 4-123
FIGURE 4-255B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS PAGE ............................................................. 4-124
FIGURE 4-256 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................. 4-124
FIGURE 4-257 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................. 4-124
FIGURE 4-258 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE.............................................. 4-125
FIGURE 4-259 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................. 4-125
FIGURE 4-260 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................ 4-125
FIGURE 4-261 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................ 4-126
FIGURE 4-262 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE...................................................................... 4-126
FIGURE 4-263 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE...................................................................... 4-126
FIGURE 4-264 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT PAGE .................................. 4-127
FIGURE 4-265 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT PAGE........................................ 4-127
FIGURE 4-266A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE ................................................................... 4-128
FIGURE 4-266B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMITING PAGE................................................... 4-128
FIGURE 4-266C ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE ........................................................................... 4-129
FIGURE 4-267 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE ................................................ 4-129
FIGURE 4-267A SEARCH AND RESCUE PAGE ............................................................... 4-130
FIGURE 4-267B EXTERNAL WAYPOINT PAGE ............................................................... 4-130
FIGURE 4-267C DATUM PLAN PAGE ............................................................................... 4-131
FIGURE 4-267D EGPWS TERRAIN DISPLAY ON FMS PAGE ......................................... 4-131
FIGURE 4-268 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE .......................................... 4-132
FIGURE 4-269 THIS FMS IS: PAGE ................................................................................ 4-132
FIGURE 4-270 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE ................................................................. 4-132
FIGURE 4-271 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE.................................... 4-133
FIGURE 4-272 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE ................................................................. 4-133
FIGURE 4-273 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE.................................... 4-134
FIGURE 4-274 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE ................................................................. 4-134
FIGURE 4-275 POSITION UNIT #2 IS: PAGE ................................................................. 4-134
FIGURE 4-276 DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE......................................................................... 4-135
FIGURE 4-277 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE.............................................. 4-135
FIGURE 4-278 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE ........................................... 4-135
FIGURE 4-279 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE ................................................ 4-136
FIGURE 4-280 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE ....................................................................... 4-136
FIGURE 4-281 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE .................................................................... 4-136
FIGURE 4-282 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE ................................................................. 4-137
FIGURE 4-283 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE ........................................................................... 4-137
FIGURE 4-284A EFIS DME ARC STYLE PAGE ................................................................ 4-137
FIGURE 4-284B DME ARC STYLE PAGE ......................................................................... 4-138

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-14


J GNS-XLS

ITEM PAGE

FIGURE 4-285 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE................................... 4-138


FIGURE 4-286 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE ..................................................... 4-139
FIGURE 4-287 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE .......................................... 4-139
FIGURE 4-288 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS: PAGE ................................................... 4-139
FIGURE 4-289 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE.................................................................... 4-140
FIGURE 4-290 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS: PAGE .................................................... 4-140
FIGURE 4-291 SIMULATOR MODE: PAGE..................................................................... 4-140
FIGURE 4-292 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE................................... 4-141
FIGURE 4-293A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1 ......................................................... 4-141
FIGURE 4-293B FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2 ......................................................... 4-142
FIGURE 4-294A FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1............................................ 4-142
FIGURE 4-294B FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 2............................................ 4-143
FIGURE 4-294C FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3............................................ 4-143
FIGURE 4-295A PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1 ......................................... 4-143
FIGURE 4-295B PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 2 ......................................... 4-144
FIGURE 4-295C PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3 ......................................... 4-144
FIGURE 4-296A DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1.......................................... 4-144
FIGURE 4-296B DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 2.......................................... 4-145
FIGURE 4-296C DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 3.......................................... 4-145
FIGURE 4-296D DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 4.......................................... 4-145
FIGURE 4-296E DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 5.......................................... 4-146
FIGURE 4-296F DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 6.......................................... 4-146
FIGURE 4-296G DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 7.......................................... 4-146
FIGURE 4-296H DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8.......................................... 4-147
FIGURE 4-296I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT PAGE ................................................... 4-147
FIGURE 4-297 AC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE ............................................. 4-148
FIGURE 4-298 DC COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE.................................. 4-148
FIGURE 4-299 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE ......................................................................... 4-148
FIGURE 4-300 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE ............................................. 4-149
FIGURE 4-301A RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 1 ......................... 4-149
FIGURE 4-301B RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 2 ......................... 4-150
FIGURE 4-301C RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 3 ......................... 4-150
FIGURE 4-301D RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 4 ......................... 4-150
FIGURE 4-301E RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 5 ......................... 4-151
FIGURE 4-302 AUTOTUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE PAGE .......................................... 4-151
FIGURE 4-303 AUTOTUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF: ........................................... 4-151
FIGURE 4-304 AUTOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF: .......................................... 4-152
FIGURE 4-305 VOR BEARING PAGE ............................................................................. 4-152
FIGURE 4-306 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE ..................................................................... 4-152
FIGURE 4-307A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE ..................................................................... 4-153
FIGURE 4-307B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS PAGE ............................................................. 4-153
FIGURE 4-308 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................. 4-154
FIGURE 4-309 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................. 4-154
FIGURE 4-310 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE.............................................. 4-154
FIGURE 4-311 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................. 4-155
FIGURE 4-312 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................ 4-155
FIGURE 4-313 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................ 4-155
FIGURE 4-314 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE...................................................................... 4-156
FIGURE 4-315 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE...................................................................... 4-156

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-15


J GNS-XLS

ITEM PAGE

FIGURE 4-316 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT. PAGE ................................. 4-156
FIGURE 4-317 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT. PAGE....................................... 4-157
FIGURE 4-318A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE ................................................................... 4-157
FIGURE 4-318B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMITING PAGE................................................... 4-158
FIGURE 4-318C HIGH ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE ................................................................. 4-158
FIGURE 4-319 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE ................................................ 4-159
FIGURE 4-319A SEARCH AND RESCUE PAGE ............................................................... 4-159
FIGURE 4-319B EXTERNAL WAYPOINT PAGE ............................................................... 4-160
FIGURE 4-319C DATUM PLAN PAGE ............................................................................... 4-160
FIGURE 4-319D EGPWS TERRAIN DISPLAY ON FMS PAGE ......................................... 4-161
FIGURE 4-320 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE .......................................... 4-161
FIGURE 4-321 THIS FMS IS: PAGE ................................................................................ 4-161
FIGURE 4-322 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE ................................................................. 4-162
FIGURE 4-323 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE.................................... 4-162
FIGURE 4-324 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE ................................................................. 4-163
FIGURE 4-325 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE.................................... 4-163
FIGURE 4-326 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE ................................................................. 4-164
FIGURE 4-327 POSITION UNIT #2 IS: PAGE ................................................................. 4-164
FIGURE 4-328 DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE......................................................................... 4-164
FIGURE 4-329 WEIGHT ON GEAR PAGE ...................................................................... 4-165
FIGURE 4-330 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE.............................................. 4-165
FIGURE 4-331 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE ........................................... 4-166
FIGURE 4-332 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE ................................................ 4-166
FIGURE 4-333 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE ....................................................................... 4-166
FIGURE 4-334 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE .................................................................... 4-167
FIGURE 4-335 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE ................................................................. 4-167
FIGURE 4-336 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE ........................................................................... 4-167
FIGURE 4-337A EFIS DME ARC STYLE PAGE ................................................................ 4-168
FIGURE 4-337B DME ARC STYLE PAGE ......................................................................... 4-168
FIGURE 4-338 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE................................... 4-169
FIGURE 4-339 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE ..................................................... 4-169
FIGURE 4-340 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE .......................................... 4-169
FIGURE 4-341 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS: PAGE ................................................... 4-170
FIGURE 4-342 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE.................................................................... 4-170
FIGURE 4-343 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS: PAGE .................................................... 4-170
FIGURE 4-344 SIMULATOR MODE PAGE...................................................................... 4-171
FIGURE 4-345 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE................................... 4-171
FIGURE 4-346A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1 ......................................................... 4-172
FIGURE 4-346B FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2 ......................................................... 4-172
FIGURE 4-347A FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1............................................ 4-173
FIGURE 4-347B FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 2............................................ 4-173
FIGURE 4-347C FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3............................................ 4-173
FIGURE 4-348A PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1 ......................................... 4-174
FIGURE 4-348B PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 2 ......................................... 4-174
FIGURE 4-348C PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3 ......................................... 4-174
FIGURE 4-349A DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1.......................................... 4-175
FIGURE 4-349B DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 2.......................................... 4-175
FIGURE 4-349C DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 3.......................................... 4-175
FIGURE 4-349D DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 4.......................................... 4-176

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-16


J GNS-XLS

ITEM PAGE

FIGURE 4-349E DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 5.......................................... 4-176


FIGURE 4-349F DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 6.......................................... 4-176
FIGURE 4-349G DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 7.......................................... 4-177
FIGURE 4-349H DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8.......................................... 4-177
FIGURE 4-349I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT PAGE ................................................... 4-177
FIGURE 4-350 AC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE ............................................. 4-178
FIGURE 4-351 DC COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE.................................. 4-178
FIGURE 4-352 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE ......................................................................... 4-179
FIGURE 4-353 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE ............................................. 4-179
FIGURE 4-354A RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 1 ......................... 4-180
FIGURE 4-354B RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 2 ......................... 4-180
FIGURE 4-354C RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 3 ......................... 4-180
FIGURE 4-354D RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 4 ......................... 4-181
FIGURE 4-354E RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 5 ......................... 4-181
FIGURE 4-355 AUTOTUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE PAGE .......................................... 4-181
FIGURE 4-356 AUTOTUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF: PAGE................................. 4-182
FIGURE 4-357 AUTOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF: PAGE ............................... 4-182
FIGURE 4-358 VOR BEARING PAGE ............................................................................. 4-182
FIGURE 4-359 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE ..................................................................... 4-183
FIGURE 4-360A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE ..................................................................... 4-183
FIGURE 4-360B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS PAGE ............................................................. 4-184
FIGURE 4-361 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................. 4-184
FIGURE 4-362 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................. 4-184
FIGURE 4-363 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE.............................................. 4-185
FIGURE 4-364 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................. 4-185
FIGURE 4-365 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................ 4-185
FIGURE 4-366 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE ................................................................ 4-186
FIGURE 4-367 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE...................................................................... 4-186
FIGURE 4-368 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE...................................................................... 4-186
FIGURE 4-369 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT. PAGE ................................. 4-187
FIGURE 4-370 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT. PAGE....................................... 4-187
FIGURE 4-371A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE ................................................................... 4-188
FIGURE 4-371B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMITING PAGE................................................... 4-188
FIGURE 4-371C HIGH ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE ................................................................. 4-189
FIGURE 4-372 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE ................................................ 4-189
FIGURE 4-372A SEARCH AND RESCUE PAGE ............................................................... 4-190
FIGURE 4-372B EXTERNAL WAYPOINT PAGE ............................................................... 4-190
FIGURE 4-372C DATUM PLAN PAGE ............................................................................... 4-191
FIGURE 4-372D EGPWS TERRAIN DISPLAY ON FMS PAGE ......................................... 4-191
FIGURE 4-373 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE .......................................... 4-191
FIGURE 4-374 SELF TEST PAGE ................................................................................... 4-192
FIGURE 4-375 INITIALIZATION PAGE ............................................................................ 4-192
FIGURE 4-376 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE................................................................... 4-193
FIGURE 4-377 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE................................................................... 4-193
FIGURE 4-378 ALTITUDE PAGE ..................................................................................... 4-194
FIGURE 4-379 ALTITUDE RATE PAGE .......................................................................... 4-194
FIGURE 4-380 ALTITUDE PRESELECT PAGE............................................................... 4-194
FIGURE 4-381 ALTITUDE PRESELECT ERROR PAGE................................................. 4-195
FIGURE 4-382 TRUE AIRSPEED PAGE ......................................................................... 4-195

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-17


J GNS-XLS

ITEM PAGE

FIGURE 4-383 NO HEADING PAGE................................................................................ 4-196


FIGURE 4-384 SYNCHRO HEADING PAGE ................................................................... 4-196
FIGURE 4-385 AR429 AHRS HEADING PAGE ............................................................... 4-196
FIGURE 4-386 WEIGHT ON GEAR PAGE ...................................................................... 4-197
FIGURE 4-387 ALTITUDE PRESELECT ERROR VALID PAGE ..................................... 4-197
FIGURE 4-388 SPARE DISCRETES IN PAGE ................................................................ 4-197
FIGURE 4-389 DISCRETES LOW PAGE......................................................................... 4-198
FIGURE 4-390 DISCRETES HI PAGE ............................................................................. 4-198
FIGURE 4-391 DISCRETES OTHER PAGE .................................................................... 4-198
FIGURE 4-392 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE................................................................... 4-199
FIGURE 4-393 HSI BEARING PAGE ............................................................................... 4-199
FIGURE 4-394 HSI COURSE PAGE ................................................................................ 4-200
FIGURE 4-395 VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE ................................................................ 4-200
FIGURE 4-396 CROSS TRACK DEV. PAGE ................................................................... 4-201
FIGURE 4-397 ROLL STEERING PAGE.......................................................................... 4-201
FIGURE 4-398 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE .................................................................... 4-202
FIGURE 4-399 ARINC 571 OUTPUT PAGE .................................................................... 4-202
FIGURE 4-400 SYSTEM VALID FLAG PAGE .................................................................. 4-202
FIGURE 4-401 RADIO TUNE VALID FLAG PAGE .......................................................... 4-203
FIGURE 4-402 DISTANCE VALID FLAG PAGE .............................................................. 4-203
FIGURE 4-403 SELECTED CROSS-TRACK WARN PAGE ............................................ 4-203
FIGURE 4-404 REMOTE DR ANNUNCIATOR PAGE...................................................... 4-204
FIGURE 4-405 REMOTE WPT ANNUNCIATOR PAGE................................................... 4-204
FIGURE 4-406 REMOTE MESSAGE ANNUNCIATOR PAGE ......................................... 4-204
FIGURE 4-407 HSI VALID FLAG PAGE........................................................................... 4-205
FIGURE 4-408 TO/FROM FLAG PAGE ........................................................................... 4-205
FIGURE 4-409 STEERING VALID FLAG PAGE .............................................................. 4-205
FIGURE 4-410 APPROACH MODE VALID PAGE ........................................................... 4-206
FIGURE 4-411 VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID PAGE ..................................................... 4-206
FIGURE 4-412 HEADING MODE VALID PAGE ............................................................... 4-207
FIGURE 4-413 INITIALIZATION PAGE ............................................................................ 4-207
FIGURE 4-414 GPS SUBSECTION 1/3 PAGE ................................................................ 4-208
FIGURE 4-415 GPS SUBSECTION 3/3 PAGE ................................................................ 4-208
FIGURE 4-416 GPS SUBSECTION 2/3 PAGE ................................................................ 4-209
FIGURE 4-417 GPS SUBSECTION 3/3 PAGE ................................................................ 4-209

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-18


J GNS-XLS

ITEM PAGE

TABLE 1-1 GNS-XLS Control Display Unit Characteristics ............................................ 1-3


TABLE 1-2 GNS-XLS Configuration Module Characteristics.......................................... 1-3
TABLE 1-3 Low Gain GPS Antenna Characteristics ...................................................... 1-4
TABLE 1-4 High Gain GPS Antenna Characteristics...................................................... 1-4
TABLE 1-5 KA 91 GPS Antenna Characteristics ............................................................ 1-5
TABLE 1-6 KA 92 GPS Antenna Characteristics ............................................................ 1-5
TABLE 1-7 GNS-XLS Unit Configurations ...................................................................... 1-7
TABLE 1-8 GNS-XLS Unit Configurations ...................................................................... 1-9
TABLE 1-9 Low Gain GPS Antenna Cable Selection ................................................... 1-10
TABLE 1-10 High Gain GPS Antenna Cable Selection .................................................. 1-10
TABLE 1-11 GNS-XLS CDU Installation Kit (P/N 149-018209-0001)............................. 1-11
TABLE 1-12 GNS-XLS Connector Assembly (P/N 310-017956-01)............................... 1-11
TABLE 1-13 GNS-XLS Main Connector (Jerrik P/N JHA1-800-359) .............................. 1-12
TABLE 1-14 GNS-XLS Coax Connectors ....................................................................... 1-12
TABLE 1-15 GPS Antenna Cable Connectors................................................................ 1-12
TABLE 1-16 Global GPS Antenna Installation Spare Parts ............................................ 1-13
TABLE 1-17 KA 91 GPS Antenna Installation Kit ........................................................... 1-13
TABLE 1-18 KA 92 GPS Antenna Installation Kit ........................................................... 1-13
TABLE 1-19 Equipment and Materials............................................................................ 1-14
TABLE 3-1 ARINC 743A GPS Labels........................................................................... 3-17
TABLE 3-2 GNS-XLS Data to Weather Graphics RPU ................................................ 3-94
TABLE 3-3 GAMA ARINC 429 High Speed Bus Output ............................................. 3-111
TABLE 3-4 GAMA ARINC 429 Low Speed Bus Output.............................................. 3-114
TABLE 3-5 Additional GAMA ARINC 429 Outputs for BAe 146 Configuration ........... 3-117
TABLE 3-6 Additional 429 Outputs for BAe 146 Configuration.................................. 3-117
TABLE 3-7 ARINC 561 Digital Output ........................................................................ 3-130
TABLE 3-8 KCPB Bus Labels ..................................................................................... 3-141
TABLE 3-9 429 TRANSMIT 1/ EGPWS Low Speed ARINC 429 Bus Labels............. 3-142
TABLE 3-10 GNS-XLS CDU Connector (J101) Pin Function List ................................ 3-150
TABLE 3-11 Configuration Module Pin Function List.................................................... 3-157

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-19


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TC-20


J GNS-XLS

SECTION I
GENERAL INFORMATION

1.0 INTRODUCTION
This manual contains information on the physical, mechanical, and electrical characteristics of the
Global GNS-XLS Flight Management System.

1.1 APPLICABILITY OF THE SYSTEM MANUAL


1.1.1 EQUIPMENT APPLICABILITY
This manual is applicable only to the following GNS-XLS Flight Management System units:
GNS-XLS Control P/N 17960-0101-XXXX
Display Unit (CDU) P/N 17960-0102-XXXX
P/N 17960-0203-XXXX
GNS-XLS Configuration Module P/N 17680-01
Low Gain GPS Antenna P/N 121-017686-01
High Gain GPS Antenna P/N 121-018290-01
KA 91 GPS Antenna P/N 071-01545-0200
KA 92 GPS Antenna P/N 071-01553-0200
1.1.2 ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT
An additional ARNAV 5115 RPU (Remote Processing Unit) P/N 453-2530-08 is required to display
AFIS weather graphics on GNS-XLS CDU P/N 17960-0203-XXXX. Refer to 2.2.5 ARNAV RE-
MOTE PROCESSING UNIT INSTALLATION for installation considerations.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION


1.2.1 GNS-XLS SYSTEM
The GNS-XLS is an integrated, long-range, multi-sensor navigation and frequency management
system comprised of the GNS-XLS Control Display Unit (CDU) and a GPS antenna The CDU has
an internal GPS receiver with four antenna options.
A. Navigation Capabilities
In addition to conventional selected course/waypoint area navigation, the GNS-XLS
provides direct point-to-point navigation along geodesic routes from selected origin
and destination waypoints. The GNS-XLS (except P/N 17960-0101-XXXX) is ca-
pable of FDE operation using GPS as the sole source of oceanic navigation, and
is Basic Area Navigation (BRNAV) capable per AC 90-96. Other navigation capa-
bilities include:
1. Navigation from flight plans which allows the use of published
routes or other flight paths more complex than direct point-to-point
navigation.
2. Parallel track flight which allows flight at a selected distance from
and parallel to the originally selected track.
3. Vertical navigation along ascent and descent profiles whose end
points are related to flight plan waypoints.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 1-1


J GNS-XLS

4. The ability to capture the coordinates of a pilot defined waypoint and


produce a labeled waypoint.
5. The ability to designate waypoints by identifier, latitude and longi-
tude, or by radial and distance, relative to a selected reference
point.
B. Enhanced Capabilities
In addition to the above navigation capabilities, the GNS-XLS P/N 17960-0203-
XXXX provides the enhanced capabilities of search and rescue, enhanced ground
proximity warning system graphics, AFIS weather graphics, and an ARINC 734A
GPS interface.
1.2.2 FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT
The Frequency Management capability of the GNS-XLS provides complete control of COMM,
NAV, ADF, and DME frequencies and Transponder IDENT. Selected frequencies for all active
systems are displayed on the Control Display Unit (CDU).
1.2.3 DATABASE
The GNS-XLS is an "earth-oriented" navigation system that determines its location in terms of lat-
itude and longitude. Positional data inputs to the system must also be defined by latitude and lon-
gitude, or referenced to a point on the ground whose latitude and longitude are known. The data
base in the CDU can be loaded with an extensive library of navaid data, which includes the latitude
and longitude of the following:
A. VHF navaids including all co-located VOR/DME ground stations, VOR only ground
stations, DME only ground stations, VORTAC, TACAN, and ILS/DME stations.
B. Airport Reference Points of all airports with hard surfaced runways with a length of
2000 feet or more, as well as airport outer markers and runway thresholds.
C. High and Low Altitude Waypoints, Standard Instrument Departure (SID) waypoints,
Standard Terminal Arrival Route (STAR) waypoints, Approach Intersections, and
Non-precision Approaches.
The data base loaded into the GNS-XLS at the time of manufacture includes current worldwide na-
vaids and Airport Reference Points for airports with runways of 2000 feet or greater. GNS-XLS
System owners are shipped data base revisions every 28 days in the form of a Personal Computer
Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA) card. The first year revision subscription cost
is included in the purchase price of the system, and begins at the date of warranty registration.
Additional revision service may be purchased for an additional fee.
1.2.4 ARINC INTERFACES
The GNS-XLS may be interfaced to ARINC 704 IRS, ARINC 571 INS, or ARINC 743 GPS sensors.
1.2.5 VLF/OMEGA
The GNS-XLS was originally certified with optional VLF/Omega sensors. Since the Omega net-
work was decommissioned in 1997, VLF/Omega information has been removed from this manual.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 1-2


J GNS-XLS

1.3 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

TABLE 1-1 GNS-XLS Control Display Unit Characteristics


GNS-XLS CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (CDU)
P/N 17960-0101-XXXX
P/N 17960-0102-XXXX
P/N 17960-0203-XXXX

TSO COMPLIANCE: See TSO APPENDIX

PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS: See FIGURE 2-3 GNS-XLS Outline and Mounting


Drawing

WEIGHT: See FIGURE 2-3 GNS-XLS Outline and Mounting


Drawing

POWER REQUIREMENTS: 28 VDC @ 1.6 amps nominal, 3.6 amps


maximum

LIGHTING:
5 VAC 0.1 amps max.
5 VDC 0.1 amps max.
28 VDC 0.1 amps max.

TABLE 1-2 GNS-XLS Configuration Module Characteristics


CONFIGURATION MODULE
P/N 17680-01

TSO COMPLIANCE: See TSO APPENDIX

PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS: See FIGURE 2-5 Configuration Module Outline


and Mounting Drawing

WEIGHT: See FIGURE 2-5 Configuration Module Outline


and Mounting Drawing

POWER REQUIREMENTS: Supplied by GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 1-3


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 1-3 Low Gain GPS Antenna Characteristics


LOW GAIN GPS ANTENNA
P/N 121-017686-01

TSO COMPLIANCE: See TSO APPENDIX

PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS: See FIGURE 2-6 Global Low Gain GPS Antenna
Outline and Mounting Drawing

WEIGHT: See FIGURE 2-6 Global Low Gain GPS Antenna


Outline and Mounting Drawing

MOUNTING: External

POWER REQUIREMENTS: Supplied by GNS-XLS

TABLE 1-4 High Gain GPS Antenna Characteristics


HIGH GAIN GPS ANTENNA
P/N 121-018290-01

TSO COMPLIANCE: See TSO APPENDIX

PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS: See FIGURE 2-7 Global High Gain GPS Antenna
Outline and Mounting Drawing

WEIGHT: See FIGURE 2-7 Global High Gain GPS Antenna


Outline and Mounting Drawing

MOUNTING: External

POWER REQUIREMENTS: Supplied by GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 1-4


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 1-5 KA 91 GPS Antenna Characteristics


KA 91 GPS ANTENNA
P/N 071-01545-0200

TSO COMPLIANCE: See TSO APPENDIX

PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS: See FIGURE 2-8 KA 91 GPS Antenna Outline and


Mounting Drawing

WEIGHT: See FIGURE 2-8 KA 91 GPS Antenna Outline and


Mounting Drawing

OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 50 Ohms (nominal)

AIRSPEED RATING: 600 kts. TAS

POWER REQUIREMENTS: Supplied by GNS-XLS

TABLE 1-6 KA 92 GPS Antenna Characteristics


KA 92 GPS ANTENNA
P/N 071-01553-0200

TSO COMPLIANCE: See TSO APPENDIX

PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS: See FIGURE 2-11 KA 92 GPS Antenna Outline


and Mounting Drawing

WEIGHT: See FIGURE 2-11 KA 92 GPS Antenna Outline


and Mounting Drawing

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS: See FIGURE 2-12 KA 92 GPS Antenna Drawing

AIRSPEED RATING: 600 kts. TAS

POWER REQUIREMENTS: Supplied by GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 1-5


J GNS-XLS

1.4 UNITS AND ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED


1.4.1 GNS-XLS CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT
Configurations of the Control Display Unit of the GNS-XLS Flight Management System are shown
in FIGURE 1-1 GNS-XLS Configuration Chart (-010X), FIGURE 1-2 GNS-XLS Configuration
Chart (-0203), TABLE 1-7 GNS-XLS Unit Configurations, and TABLE 1-8 GNS-XLS Unit Config-
urations.

FIGURE 1-1 GNS-XLS Configuration Chart (-010X)


(P/N 17960-0101-XXXX, P/N 17960-0102-XXXX)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 1-6


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 1-7 GNS-XLS Unit Configurations


(P/N 17960-0101-XXXX, P/N 17960-0102-XXXX) (Sheet 1 of 2)
PART NUMBER ADVISORY APPROACH FDE BRNAV ANALOG VIEWING BEZEL LIGHTING
VNAV INTERFACE ANGLE COLOR COLOR
17960-0101-0001 YES YES NO NO YES 305A/105B GRAY BLUE/WHITE
17960-0101-0002 YES YES NO NO YES 305A/105B GRAY WHITE
17960-0101-0003 YES YES NO NO YES 305A/105B BLACK BLUE/WHITE
17960-0101-0004 YES YES NO NO YES 305A/105B BLACK WHITE
17960-0101-0005 YES YES NO NO YES 305A/105B BROWN BLUE/WHITE
17960-0101-0006 YES YES NO NO YES 305A/105B BROWN WHITE
17960-0101-0101 YES YES NO NO NO 305A/105B GRAY BLUE/WHITE
17960-0101-0102 YES YES NO NO NO 305A/105B GRAY WHITE
17960-0101-0103 YES YES NO NO NO 305A/105B BLACK BLUE/WHITE
17960-0101-0104 YES YES NO NO NO 305A/105B BLACK WHITE
17960-0101-0105 YES YES NO NO NO 305A/105B BROWN BLUE/WHITE
17960-0101-0106 YES YES NO NO NO 305A/105B BROWN WHITE
17960-0101-0011 YES YES NO NO YES 105A/305B GRAY BLUE/WHITE
17960-0101-0012 YES YES NO NO YES 105A/305B GRAY WHITE
17960-0101-0013 YES YES NO NO YES 105A/305B BLACK BLUE/WHITE
17960-0101-0014 YES YES NO NO YES 105A/305B BLACK WHITE
17960-0101-0015 YES YES NO NO YES 105A/305B BROWN BLUE/WHITE
17960-0101-0016 YES YES NO NO YES 105A/305B BROWN WHITE
17960-0101-0111 YES YES NO NO NO 105A/305B GRAY BLUE/WHITE
17960-0101-0112 YES YES NO NO NO 105A/305B GRAY WHITE
17960-0101-0113 YES YES NO NO NO 105A/305B BLACK BLUE/WHITE
17960-0101-0114 YES YES NO NO NO 105A/305B BLACK WHITE
17960-0101-0115 YES YES NO NO NO 105A/305B BROWN BLUE/WHITE
17960-0101-0116 YES YES NO NO NO 105A/305B BROWN WHITE
17960-0102-0001 YES YES YES YES YES 305A/105B GRAY BLUE/WHITE
17960-0102-0002 YES YES YES YES YES 305A/105B GRAY WHITE
17960-0102-0003 YES YES YES YES YES 305A/105B BLACK BLUE/WHITE
17960-0102-0004 YES YES YES YES YES 305A/105B BLACK WHITE
17960-0102-0005 YES YES YES YES YES 305A/105B BROWN BLUE/WHITE
17960-0102-0006 YES YES YES YES YES 305A/105B BROWN WHITE
17960-0102-0101 YES YES YES YES NO 305A/105B GRAY BLUE/WHITE
17960-0102-0102 YES YES YES YES NO 305A/105B GRAY WHITE
17960-0102-0103 YES YES YES YES NO 305A/105B BLACK BLUE/WHITE
17960-0102-0104 YES YES YES YES NO 305A/105B BLACK WHITE
17960-0102-0105 YES YES YES YES NO 305A/105B BROWN BLUE/WHITE
17960-0102-0106 YES YES YES YES NO 305A/105B BROWN WHITE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 1-7


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 1-7 GNS-XLS Unit Configurations


(P/N 17960-0101-XXXX, P/N 17960-0102-XXXX) (Sheet 2 of 2)

PART NUMBER ADVISORY APPROACH FDE BRNAV ANALOG VIEWING BEZEL LIGHTING
VNAV INTERFACE ANGLE COLOR COLOR
17960-0102-0011 YES YES YES YES YES 105A/305B GRAY BLUE/WHITE
17960-0102-0012 YES YES YES YES YES 105A/305B GRAY WHITE
17960-0102-0013 YES YES YES YES YES 105A/305B BLACK BLUE/WHITE
17960-0102-0014 YES YES YES YES YES 105A/305B BLACK WHITE
17960-0102-0015 YES YES YES YES YES 105A/305B BROWN BLUE/WHITE
17960-0102-0016 YES YES YES YES YES 105A/305B BROWN WHITE
17960-0102-0111 YES YES YES YES NO 105A/305B GRAY BLUE/WHITE
17960-0102-0112 YES YES YES YES NO 105A/305B GRAY WHITE
17960-0102-0113 YES YES YES YES NO 105A/305B BLACK BLUE/WHITE
17960-0102-0114 YES YES YES YES NO 105A/305B BLACK WHITE
17960-0102-0115 YES YES YES YES NO 105A/305B BROWN BLUE/WHITE
17960-0102-0116 YES YES YES YES NO 105A/305B BROWN WHITE

FIGURE 1-2 GNS-XLS Configuration Chart (-0203)


(P/N 17960-0203-XXXX)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 1-8


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 1-8 GNS-XLS Unit Configurations


(P/N 17960-0203-XXXX)

PART NUMBER BRNAV SEARCH EGPWS AFIS EXT ANALOG VIEWING BEZEL LIGHTING KEY
RESCUE TERR WX GPS OUT ANGLE COLOR COLOR FORMAT
17960-0203-0001 YES YES YES YES YES YES 305A/105B GRAY BLUE/WHITE STANDARD
17960-0203-0002 YES YES YES YES YES YES 305A/105B GRAY WHITE STANDARD
17960-0203-0003 YES YES YES YES YES YES 305A/105B BLACK BLUE/WHITE STANDARD
17960-0203-0004 YES YES YES YES YES YES 305A/105B BLACK WHITE STANDARD
17960-0203-0005 YES YES YES YES YES YES 305A/105B GRAY BLUE/WHITE QWERTY
17960-0203-0006 YES YES YES YES YES YES 305A/105B GRAY WHITE QWERTY
17960-0203-0007 YES YES YES YES YES YES 305A/105B BLACK BLUE/WHITE QWERTY
17960-0203-0008 YES YES YES YES YES YES 305A/105B BLACK WHITE QWERTY
17960-0203-0011 YES YES YES YES YES YES 105A/305B GRAY BLUE/WHITE STANDARD
17960-0203-0012 YES YES YES YES YES YES 105A/305B GRAY WHITE STANDARD
17960-0203-0013 YES YES YES YES YES YES 105A/305B BLACK BLUE/WHITE STANDARD
17960-0203-0014 YES YES YES YES YES YES 105A/305B BLACK WHITE STANDARD
17960-0203-0015 YES YES YES YES YES YES 105A/305B GRAY BLUE/WHITE QWERTY
17960-0203-0016 YES YES YES YES YES YES 105A/305B GRAY WHITE QWERTY
17960-0203-0017 YES YES YES YES YES YES 105A/305B BLACK BLUE/WHITE QWERTY
17960-0203-0018 YES YES YES YES YES YES 105A/305B BLACK WHITE QWERTY
17960-0203-0101 YES YES YES YES YES NO 305A/105B GRAY BLUE/WHITE STANDARD
17960-0203-0102 YES YES YES YES YES NO 305A/105B GRAY WHITE STANDARD
17960-0203-0103 YES YES YES YES YES NO 305A/105B BLACK BLUE/WHITE STANDARD
17960-0203-0104 YES YES YES YES YES NO 305A/105B BLACK WHITE STANDARD
17960-0203-0105 YES YES YES YES YES NO 305A/105B GRAY BLUE/WHITE QWERTY
17960-0203-0106 YES YES YES YES YES NO 305A/105B GRAY WHITE QWERTY
17960-0203-0107 YES YES YES YES YES NO 305A/105B BLACK BLUE/WHITE QWERTY
17960-0203-0108 YES YES YES YES YES NO 305A/105B BLACK WHITE QWERTY
17960-0203-0111 YES YES YES YES YES NO 105A/305B GRAY BLUE/WHITE STANDARD
17960-0203-0112 YES YES YES YES YES NO 105A/305B GRAY WHITE STANDARD
17960-0203-0113 YES YES YES YES YES NO 105A/305B BLACK BLUE/WHITE STANDARD
17960-0203-0114 YES YES YES YES YES NO 105A/305B BLACK WHITE STANDARD
17960-0203-0115 YES YES YES YES YES NO 105A/305B GRAY BLUE/WHITE QWERTY
17960-0203-0116 YES YES YES YES YES NO 105A/305B GRAY WHITE QWERTY
17960-0203-0117 YES YES YES YES YES NO 105A/305B BLACK BLUE/WHITE QWERTY
17960-0203-0118 YES YES YES YES YES NO 105A/305B BLACK WHITE QWERTY

1.4.2 CONFIGURATION MODULE


The configuration module for the GNS-XLS is part of the mating connector backshell assembly. It
is programmed with aircraft specific configuration information. The configuration module is avail-
able under P/N 17680-01.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 1-9


J GNS-XLS

1.4.3 GPS ANTENNAS


Four versions of the GPS antenna are available for the GNS-XLS. The low gain versions include
the Global GPS Antenna (P/N 121-017686-01), the TSO'd Bendix/King KA 91 (P/N 071-01545-
0200), and the aerodynamically designed Bendix/King KA 92 (P/N 071-01553-0200). The Global
GPS Antenna (P/N 121-018290-01) is a high gain version. Coaxial assemblies and lengths may
vary according to the antenna used in the system installation. See TABLE 1-9 Low Gain GPS An-
tenna Cable Selection and TABLE 1-10 High Gain GPS Antenna Cable Selection for cable length/
loss recommendations.
TABLE 1-9 Low Gain GPS Antenna Cable Selection
LOW GAIN GPS CABLE TYPES AND PERMISSIBLE RUN LENGTHS
(8dB allowable loss)
CABLE TYPE CABLE RUN LENGTH
R/G 142B/U P/N 024-00002-0000 (see Note 1) Up to 46 ft.
R/G 400/U P/N 024-00051-0060 (see Note 1) Up to 46 ft.
PIC S14293 Up to 50 ft.
ECS 311901 (see Note 1) Up to 56 ft.
PIC S44191 (see Note 1) Up to 58 ft.
ECS 311601 Up to 80 ft.
ECS 311201 Up to 100 ft.
Notes:
1. Use RG 142/400 style connectors.
2. All cables for use with Low Gain Global (121-017686-01), KA 91 (P/N 071-01545-0200), and
KA 92 (P/N 071-01553-0200) GPS antennas.
3. If a satellite communication system is installed in the aircraft, or the GPS cable run is
in the vicinity of a VHF Transceiver and/or cable, DO NOT USE R/G 142 or R/G 400 cable
regardless of cable run length.

TABLE 1-10 High Gain GPS Antenna Cable Selection


HIGH GAIN GPS CABLE TYPES AND PERMISSIBLE RUN LENGTHS
(22dB allowable loss)
CABLE TYPE CABLE RUN LENGTH
R/G 142B/U P/N 024-00002-0000 (see Note 1) Up to 126 ft.
R/G 400/U P/N 024-00051-0060 (see Note 1) Up to 126 ft.
PIC S14293 Up to 137 ft.
ECS 311901 (see Note 1) Up to 154 ft.
PIC S44191 (see Note 1) Up to 159 ft.
Notes:
1. Use RG 142/400 style connectors.
2. All cables for use with High Gain Global (121-018290-01) GPS antenna.
3. If a satellite communication system is installed in the aircraft, or the GPS cable run is
in the vicinity of a VHF Transceiver and/or cable, DO NOT USE R/G 142 or R/G 400 cable
regardless of cable run length.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 1-10


J GNS-XLS

1.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED


1.5.1 CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT INSTALLATION KIT
TABLE 1-11 GNS-XLS CDU Installation Kit (P/N 149-018209-0001)
P/N DESCRIPTION UM -0001 VENDOR NAME & PART #
030-00101-0002 PANEL MOUNT PLUG EA 1 N/A
129-018974-01 CONN, TNC PUSH-ON, RT ANGLE EA 1 N/A
129-217956-03 GNS-XLS CONN BACKSHELL CVR EA 1 N/A
146-018428-01 GNS-XLS CONN BACKSHELL KIT EA 1 N/A
310-017956-01 CONNECTOR ASSY, FILTERED EA 1 N/A
17680-01 CONFIGURATION MODULE EA 1 N/A
PMS16624-4043 RING, OUTSIDE SNAP EA 1 N/A
Parts for connector assembly P/N 310-017956-01 can be ordered separately from the list below.

TABLE 1-12 GNS-XLS Connector Assembly (P/N 310-017956-01)


P/N DESCRIPTION UM QTY VENDOR NAME & PART #
129-217956-02 CONNECTOR, FILTERED EA 1 Jerrik JHA1-800-359
129-217956-04 BRACKET, CONFIGURATION EA 1 Jerrik JHA1-800-767
16076-1 WIRE, 22 AWG 19STR BRN FT AR M16878/4-BFE-1
16076-2 WIRE, 22 AWG 19STR RED FT AR M16878/4-BFE-2
16076-3 WIRE, 22 AWG 19STR ORN FT AR M16878/4-BFE-3
16076-4 WIRE, 22 AWG 19STR YEL FT AR M16878/4-BFE-4
16076-5 WIRE, 22 AWG 19STR GRN FT AR M16878/4-BFE-5
16076-6 WIRE, 22 AWG 19STR BLU FT AR M16878/4-BFE-6
310-017685-02 CONNECTOR BOARD, CONFIG MOD EA 1
PMS24693-C3 SCREW 4-40 X 5/16 FHP EA 2
PMS35338-135 WASHER, SPLITLOCK 4 EA 2
PMS51957-2 SCREW 2-56 X 3/16 PHP EA 2
Parts for the main connector P/N 129-217956-02 (Jerrik P/N JHA1-800-359) listed below may be
ordered separately from the manufacturer.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 1-11


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 1-13 GNS-XLS Main Connector (Jerrik P/N JHA1-800-359)


P/N DESCRIPTION VENDOR NAME & PART #
CONTACT, ARINC 600 #22 M39029/12-148
CONTACT, ARINC 600 #16 M39029/57-358
ASSEMBLY, JACK SCREW W/ SNAP RING AND Cannon 305-0007-000
WASHERS
ASSEMBLY, COUPLING NUT Cannon 335-0002-000
The coax connector P/N 129-018974-01 included in kit P/N 149-018209-0001 can be used only
with RG142, RG400, PIC S14293, PIC S44191, or ECS 311901 cable. If one of the other ap-
proved cables are used, refer to TABLE 1-14 GNS-XLS Coax Connectors for the proper coax con-
nector.

TABLE 1-14 GNS-XLS Coax Connectors


P/N DESCRIPTION VENDOR NAME & PART #
030-00452-0000 BMA CONN FOR ECS 311601 CABLE TED 9-30-26
030-00452-0001 BMA CONN FOR ECS 311201 CABLE TED 9-30-25

1.5.2 GPS ANTENNA CONNECTOR


The connector for the GPS antenna is a TNC and is available in both straight and right angle con-
figurations. A different connector may also be used for different types of antenna cable. The fol-
lowing is a list of options.
TABLE 1-15 GPS Antenna Cable Connectors
P/N DESCRIPTION VENDOR NAME & PART #
030-00108-0002 TNC ST CRMP FOR ECS 311601 CABLE TED 5-10-307
030-00108-0003 TNC ST CRMP FOR ECS 311201 CABLE TED 5-10-306
030-00134-0000 TNC ST CRMP FOR RG 142/400 CABLE TED 5-10-30
030-00134-0001 TNC RT ANGLE FOR RG 142/400 CABLE TED 5-30-102
Uses RG 142/400 TNC ST CRMP FOR ECS 311901 CABLE N/A
Connectors Above
Uses RG 142/400 TNC ST CRMP FOR PIC S14293 CABLE N/A
Connectors Above
Uses RG 142/400 TNC ST CRMP FOR PIC S44191 CABLE N/A
Connectors Above

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 1-12


J GNS-XLS

1.5.3 GLOBAL GPS ANTENNA INSTALLATION SPARE PARTS


Spare installation gaskets and screws for the Global Low Gain GPS Antenna P/N 121-017686-01
and Global High Gain GPS Antenna P/N 121-018290-01 are listed below and may be ordered sep-
arately from the manufacturer (Sensor).
TABLE 1-16 Global GPS Antenna Installation Spare Parts
P/N DESCRIPTION VENDOR NAME & PART #
Gasket Sensor S67-200229
Screw MS24693C274

1.5.4 KA 91 GPS Antenna Installation Kit


The KA91 GPS Antenna installation kit, P/N 050-03195-0000, contains the following parts:
TABLE 1-17 KA 91 GPS Antenna Installation Kit
P/N DESCRIPTION UM -0000 VENDOR NAME & PART #
050-03195-0000 KA91 INSTALL KIT X
030-00134-0001 CONN COAX RT ANGLE EA 1 TED MFG 5-30-102-1
047-10130-0002 BACKPLATE, ANTENNA EA 1
089-06908-0012 SCREW, AIRCRAFT EA 4
187-01807-0000 KA 91 GASKET EA 1

1.5.5 KA 92 GPS ANTENNA INSTALLATION KIT


The KA92 GPS Antenna installation kit, P/N 050-03318-0000, contains the following parts:
TABLE 1-18 KA 92 GPS Antenna Installation Kit
P/N DESCRIPTION UM -0000 VENDOR NAME & PART #
050-03318-0000 INSTALL KIT KA92 X
030-00134-0001 CONN COAX RT ANGLE EA 1 TED MFG 5-30-102-1
047-10735-0002 BACKPLATE, ANTENNA EA 1
089-05909-0012 SCR PHP 8-32 X 3/4 EA 4
187-01831-0000 ANTENNA GASKET EA 1

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 1-13


J GNS-XLS

1.6 ACCESSORIES REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED


The following is a list of equipment and materials that may be required to complete the installation
of the GNS-XLS. All the equipment and materials should be readily available from the companies
listed.
TABLE 1-19 Equipment and Materials
NAME MANUFACTURER USAGE
Air-dry Conductive Bostik Finch Anti-static paint for
Coating (Black) 20846 S. Normandie fiberglass components.
Torrance, CA 90502
Super Koropon Desoto, Inc. Radome anti-static paint.
Chemical Coatings Div.
4th and Cedar St.
Berkeley, CA 94710
Super Koropon Anti-static conductive
(Black Conductive coating.
Coating)
Conductive Coating Goodyear Tire & Rubber Anti-static, anti-erosion
Akron, Ohio conductive coating for non-
conducting components.
Astrocoat Sterling Lacquer Mfg. Co. Anti-erosion base coat
3150 Brannon Av. with anti-static top
St. Louis, MO 63139 coat for non-metallic
components.
Paint Additive Micro Circuits Co. Add to paints for
Buffalo, MI anti-static protection.

Fiberglass paint (black & Titanine, Ltd. Use on fiberglass surface


other colors) Colindale, London with addition of anti-static
N.W. 9, England additive.
Static Discharger Chelton (Electrostatic) Provide static discharge
Marlowe Buckinghamshire capabilities.
SL7 1LR, England
Static Discharger Dayton-Granger Aviation, Inc.
P.O. Box 14070
Fort Lauderdale, FL 33302
Static Discharger Granger Associates, Ltd.
1 Brooklands Road
Weybridge, Surrey
DT13 0SD, England
Static Discharger Shaw Aero Devices
Industrial Road
East Hampton, NY 11937

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 1-14


J GNS-XLS

1.7 LICENSE REQUIREMENTS


There are no license requirements for the GNS-XLS Flight Management System.

1.8 INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTINUED AIRWORTHINESS


FAR Part 25.1529 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness is met per the following instructions:
A. The removal of the GNS-XLS is on the condition of failure. There is no required
maintenance. Suggested maintenance is covered in Section 1.9 SUGGESTED
MAINTENANCE of this manual.

1.9 SUGGESTED MAINTENANCE


A. The lithium battery located within the GNS-XLS CDU provides power to memory
and the Real Time Clock (RTC) when the unit is turned off. When the battery nears
the end of life, the first indication of battery failure is the initial time displayed on the
Initialization page will be incorrect. Incorrect time will increase the time required for
the initial GPS satellite acquisition. Approximately one month after the Real Time
Clock begins to be incorrect, MEM FAIL and CNFG DATA CHANGED messages
may appear, indicating flight plans, parallax adjustments, and the configuration
module checksum may be lost. Flight plans may still be entered manually, and the
GNS-XLS will still read the configuration module correctly. It is strongly recom-
mended that the battery be replaced within one month of noticing the above symp-
toms.
If the owner prefers to replace the battery on a periodic maintenance schedule, the
suggested maintenance interval is four years. If a Battery Installation Date label is
not present, date of delivery may be used as the starting date.

CAUTION
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD
LITHIUM BATTERIES BE CRUSHED,
PIERCED OR INCINERATED IN OTHER THAN
A SPECIALLY DESIGNED FURNACE. DIS-
CHARGED OR UNWANTED BATTERIES
WHICH SHOW NO SIGN OF PHYSICAL DAM-
AGE SHOULD HAVE ANY EXPOSED ELEC-
TRICAL CONNECTIONS INSULATED AND
SHOULD BE DISPOSED OF AS HAZARDOUS
MATERIAL. IN THE EVENT THAT A LITHIUM
BATTERY SHOULD BE DAMAGED SUCH
THAT IT LEAKS A FLUID, REMOVE THE BAT-
TERY TO A WELL VENTILATED AREA UNTIL
THE ODOR HAS DISAPPEARED AND USE
COPIOUS AMOUNTS OF WATER TO WASH
AWAY THE EXTREMELY CORROSIVE ELEC-
TROLYTE. AT ANY ONE TIME, UP TO FIVE
OF THE BUTTON TYPE LITHIUM BATTERIES
MAY BE DISPOSED OF WITH DOMESTIC
RUBBISH.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 1-15


J GNS-XLS

B. The lamp which illuminates the LCD display on the GNS-XLS CDU should be re-
placed every 6,500 hours of operation. Operation in excess of this interval may re-
sult in reduced readability of the display in sunlight. Total failure of the lamp is also
possible, resulting in a dark display.
C. The lamp which illuminates the alpha-numeric keyboard should be replaced every
10,000 hours of operation. Operation in excess of this interval can result in an in-
ability to achieve the 1 Foot-Lambert level required for an undimmed keyboard.
D. All maintenance should be performed at an authorized service center.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 1-16


J GNS-XLS

SECTION II
INSTALLATION

2.0 INTRODUCTION
This section contains factors to consider when installing the GNS-XLS Flight Management System.
Close attention to these factors will assure satisfactory performance from the equipment.
The conditions and test required for the TSO and MOPS approval of this article are minimum per-
formance standards. It is the responsibility of those installing this article either on or with a speci-
fied type or class of aircraft to determine that the aircraft installation conditions are within the TSO
and MOPS standards. These articles must have separate approval for installation in an aircraft.
Any features in this equipment outside the requirements of this applicable TSO and MOPS must
be evaluated and approved as part of the installation approval. The article may be installed only
if performed under 14 CFR part 43 or the applicable airworthiness requirements.

2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING EQUIPMENT


Exercise extreme caution when unpacking equipment. Perform a visual inspection of the unit for
evidence of damage incurred during shipment. If a damage claim must be filed, save the shipping
container and all packing materials to substantiate your claim. The claim should be filed as soon
as possible. The shipping container and all packing materials should be retained in the event that
storage or re-shipment of the equipment is necessary.

2.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION


2.2.1 GENERAL
The following paragraphs contain information for the installation of the GNS-XLS Flight Manage-
ment System, including the location and mounting of the antennas.
The equipment should be installed in the aircraft in a manner consistent with acceptable workman-
ship and engineering practices, and in accordance with the instructions set forth in this publication.
To ensure the system has been properly and safely installed in the aircraft, the installer should
make a thorough visual inspection and conduct an overall operational check of the system, on the
ground, prior to flight.

CAUTION:
AFTER INSTALLATION OF THE CABLING
AND BEFORE INSTALLATION OF THE
EQUIPMENT, A CHECK SHOULD BE MADE
WITH THE AIRCRAFT PRIMARY POWER
SUPPLIED TO THE MOUNTING CONNEC-
TOR, TO ENSURE THAT POWER IS APPLIED
ONLY TO THE PINS SPECIFIED IN THE IN-
TERWIRING DIAGRAMS IN SECTION III SYS-
TEM PLANNING.
The GNS-XLS system installation will conform to standards designated by the customer, installing
agency, and existing conditions for unit location and type of installation. However, the following
factors should be carefully considered before installing your system.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-1


J GNS-XLS

2.2.2 AVIONICS COOLING REQUIREMENTS FOR PANEL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT


The most important contribution to improved reliability of all avionics equipment is to limit the max-
imum operating temperature of the individual unit, whether panel or remote mounted. While mod-
ern circuit designs consume less total energy, the heat dissipated per unit volume (Watts/ cubic
inch) remains much the same due to contemporary high density packaging techniques. While
each individual unit may or may not require forced air cooling, the combined heat generated by
several units operating in a typical panel or rack, can significantly degrade the reliability of the
equipment. Consequently, the importance of providing forced air cooling to avionics equipment
mounted in either a panel or rack is essential to the life span of the equipment. Adequate provi-
sions for cooling should be incorporated during the installation.
2.2.3 CDU INSTALLATION
2.2.3.1 Cooling Considerations
The GNS-XLS is cooled by its own fan, which is installed in the rear of the unit. Make sure that the
unit is installed in a location where the ambient temperatures are -4 deg. F to +131 deg. F (-20
deg.C to +55 deg.C). When installing the GNS-XLS, make sure that cabling and other equipment
do not block the exhaust fan.
2.2.3.2 Installation Considerations

A. Select a mounting location that is within easy reach and clearly visible to the pilot
and which allows sufficient clearance at the rear of the unit for connectors and ca-
bles. Refer to FIGURE 2-1 GNS-XLS Viewing Limitations for screen visibility limita-
tions.

FIGURE 2-1 GNS-XLS Viewing Limitations

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-2


J GNS-XLS

B. No more than 8 dB signal loss is allowed in the GPS antenna cable run. Refer to
TABLE 1-9 Low Gain GPS Antenna Cable Selection and TABLE 1-10 High Gain
GPS Antenna Cable Selection for information on cable types and lengths for the var-
ious antennas.

C. All TNC connectors must have safety wire holes and must be safety wired by cross
wiring between connectors or by wiring to their respective assemblies.

2.2.3.3 Installation Procedure

A. Cut the panel opening as shown in FIGURE 2-4 CDU Instrument Panel Mounting
Provision Drawing and mount the Dzus rails on either side of the cutout.

B. Attach the harness to the rear connector.

C. Slide the unit into the panel and secure it with the Dzus fasteners on either side of
the faceplate.

2.2.4 CONFIGURATION MODULE INSTALLATION


2.2.4.1 Cooling Considerations
Make sure that the unit is installed in a location where the ambient temperatures are -67 deg. F to
+131 deg. F (-55 deg. C to +55 deg. C).
2.2.4.2 Installation Considerations
The Configuration Module is mounted to the backshell of the mating connector of the CDU. Make
sure to leave adequate space to mount the Configuration Module when installing the CDU.
2.2.4.3 Installation Procedure

A. Install the Configuration Module onto the backshell of the CDU mating connector.
Refer to FIGURE 2-3 GNS-XLS Outline and Mounting Drawing.

B. Tighten the mounting screws to secure the Configuration Module.

2.2.5 ARNAV REMOTE PROCESSING UNIT INSTALLATION


The ARNAV 5115 RPU (Remote Processing Unit) is required to display AFIS weather graphics on
GNS-XLS CDU P/N 17960-0203-XXXX. A 5115 Installation Kit P/N 453-0083 is required to install
the. 5115 RPU.
Refer to AFIS Installation Manual P/N 150-1255-000 for installation procedures.
2.2.5.1 Cooling Considerations

A. A cooling fan or cooling air is recommended.

B. Make sure that the unit is installed in a location where the ambient temperatures are
between -20 deg. C to +70 deg. C.

2.2.5.2 Installation Considerations


Wiring length between the RPU and the GNS-XLS CDU should be no more than 15 feet. Wiring
length between the RPU and the DMU is unlimited.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-3


J GNS-XLS

2.2.5.3 Installation Procedure


Refer to AFIS Installation Manual P/N 150-1255-000 for installation procedures. Refer to Section
3.14.2 AFIS WEATHER GRAPHICS for CDU-XLS to ARNAV 5115 RPU interconnections.

2.2.6 GPS ANTENNA INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS


The GPS antenna should be mounted on top of the fuselage near the cockpit and in the centerline
of the aircraft. Avoid mounting the antenna near any projections, and the tail of the aircraft, where
shadows could occur. It is recommended that there be a separation of at least 3 feet between the
GPS antenna and any VHF Comm antenna on the aircraft. Antenna baseplate must be level with-
in 5 degrees in both axes when the aircraft is in level flight. See FIGURE 2-2 GPS Antenna Pre-
ferred Location.

FIGURE 2-2 GPS Antenna Preferred Location

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-4


J GNS-XLS

2.2.7 GPS ANTENNA INSTALLATION


A. Antenna Location
1. Mount the GPS antenna on the centerline of the aircraft on the air-
craft skin.
2. Mount the GPS antenna on the top of the aircraft, over the cockpit
or on top of the tail of the aircraft. See FIGURE 2-2 GPS Antenna
Preferred Location.
NOTE:
This location reduces the possibility of obstructing
the satellite signal because of shadowing.

3. Mount the GPS antenna on the aircraft skin which is horizontal dur-
ing enroute flight.
4. Mount the GPS antenna as far as possible from other radiating de-
vices (3 feet minimum from VHF comms, HF comms, etc. and a
minimum of 1 foot from any Satcomm antenna).
5. Mount the dual GPS antennas at least 10 inches from each other.
B. Installation
1. Make sure the GPS antenna is well-bonded to the aircraft skin.
2. Make sure the GPS antenna is sealed to the aircraft to prevent cor-
rosion from forming between the skin of the aircraft and the anten-
na.
3. Perform system checkout using the instructions in SECTION IV
POST INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION AND CHECK OUT.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-5


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-6


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 2-3 GNS-XLS Outline and Mounting Drawing


(Dwg. No. 154-018211 Rev. AB)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-7


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 2-4 CDU Instrument Panel Mounting Provision Drawing

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-9


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 2-5 Configuration Module Outline and Mounting Drawing


P/N 17680-01

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-11


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 2-6 Global Low Gain GPS Antenna Outline and Mounting Drawing
(P/N 121-017686-01, Dwg No. 121-017686 Rev. AA)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-13


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 2-7 Global High Gain GPS Antenna Outline and Mounting Drawing
(P/N 121-018290-01, Dwg No. 121-018290 Rev. 3)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-15


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 2-8 KA 91 GPS Antenna Outline and Mounting Drawing


(Dwg. No. 155-05999-0000 Rev. 5)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-17


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 2-9 KA 91 GPS Antenna Drawing


(Dwg. No. 071-01545-0200 Rev. 4)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-19


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 2-10 KA 91 GPS Antenna Backplate Outline Drawing


(Dwg. No. 047-10130-0000/-0002 Rev. 2)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-21


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 2-11 KA 92 GPS Antenna Outline and Mounting Drawing


(Dwg. No. 155-06019-0000 Rev. 2)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-23


J GNS-XLS

NOTE: THIS DRAWING IS NOT TO SCALE AND CANNOT BE USED AS A TEMPLATE.

FIGURE 2-12 KA 92 GPS Antenna Drawing


(Sheet 1 of 3)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-25


J GNS-XLS

NOTE: THIS DRAWING IS NOT TO SCALE AND CANNOT BE USED AS A TEMPLATE.

FIGURE 2-12 KA 92 GPS Antenna Drawing


(Sheet 2 of 3)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-27


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 2-12 KA 92 GPS Antenna Drawing


(Sheet 3 of 3)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-29


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 2-13 KA 92 GPS Antenna Backplate Outline Drawing


(Dwg. No. 047-10735-0000/-0002 Rev. 1)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 2-31


J GNS-XLS

SECTION III
SYSTEM PLANNING

3.0 INTRODUCTION
GNS-XLS Flight Management System requirements, system installation options, pin function lists,
block diagrams, and interconnect diagrams, and the electrical characteristics of the various inter-
faces are contained in this section. Refer to FIGURE 3-1 GNS-XLS System Block Diagram.
Detailed information concerning the purpose and operation of common interfaces are described
in the following sections.
Any operational requirements or limitations relating to an interface are described in the following
sections. Widely followed regulatory requirements may also be described here. Regionally en-
forced requirements vary greatly and adherence to them remain the responsibility of the installing
agency.
Electrical characteristics and format of interface signals are described in the following sections.
Any version-related differences in signal format are also described. Overlined pin names gener-
ally indicate active low signals, although the absence of an overline does not necessarily indicate
an active high signal.
Included are several interconnect drawings for commonly installed equipment interfaced to the
GNS-XLS. The installing agency should contact Product Support for information regarding the
compatibility of equipment not listed in this manual.
3.0.1 SHIELD TERMINATION
The harness techniques for shielding and shield termination described in this manual are identical
to those specified for the test harness used during HIRF and Lightning test certification. Adher-
ence to the information in this manual is essential to establish a certified installation environment
equivalent to the test environment used during the HIRF and Lightning test certification.
If grounding the shields at both ends of a wire causes unacceptable interference due to noise
sources on an aircraft, double shielded wire may be substituted for single shielded wire shown in
this manual. The outer shield must be grounded at both ends to comply with HIRF and Lightning
requirements. The inner shield may then be grounded at a single end to protect against the air-
craft noise source. Normally the inner shield is grounded at the source end of the signal carried
by the wire. Installing double shielded wire for low level signals known to have a history of inter-
ference may be easier than later adding the double shielded wire into the aircraft harness.
For grounding shields, follow guidelines contained in AC 43.13-1B, chapter 11.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-1


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-2


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-1 GNS-XLS System Block Diagram


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0000 Rev. AA)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-3


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-2 GNS-XLS Dual System Block Diagram


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0001 Rev. -)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-5


J GNS-XLS

3.1 GENERAL INTERCONNECT INFORMATION


3.1.1 MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACES ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
3.1.1.1 Power Inputs

A. 28 Volts Direct Current

J101-X2 +28 VDC A/C POWER IN

J101-R13 +28 VDC A/C BATTERY (keeps GPS up during power outage of
2-10 sec; 1.25 Amps @ 18 V)

3.6 Amps maximum current.

Each of these pins connect to aircraft power with 20 AWG wire minimum.

B. Power Grounds

J101-X4 DC RETURN

J101-R11 DTU POWER RETURN (used if AFIS is installed)

Each of these two pins connects to airframe ground with 20 AWG wire minimum.

3.1.1.2 Power Outputs

J101-X3 +28 VDC SWITCHED (RESERVED)

J101-R12 DTU POWER (used if AFIS is installed)

3.6 Amps maximum current.

Each of these pins connect to aircraft power with 20 AWG wire minimum.

3.1.1.3 Panel Lighting

A. 5 Volt AC Lighting

J101-F13 5 VOLT LIGHT IN

J101-G13 LIGHT RETURN (Nominally ground or XFMR Lo)

J101-F12 28 VOLT LIGHT IN (must be grounded)

Pin F13 is connected to the aircraft 5 VAC lighting bus HI using 22 AWG wire.
Pin G13 is connected to aircraft 5 VAC lighting bus LO. Pin F12 is grounded. The
maximum current draw on the lighting bus is 0.1 amps.

B. 5 Volt DC lighting

J101-F13 5 VOLT LIGHT IN

J101-F12 28 VOLT LIGHT IN

J101-G13 LIGHT RETURN (Nominally ground)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-7


J GNS-XLS

Pins F12 and F13 are connected to the aircraft 5 Vdc lighting bus HI using 22
AWG wire. Pin G13 is grounded. The maximum current draw on the lighting bus is
0.1 amps.

C. 28 Volt DC Lighting

J101-F12 28 VOLT LIGHT IN

J101-G13 LIGHT RETURN (Nominally ground or XFMR Lo)

J101-F13 5 VOLT LIGHT IN (must be grounded)

Pin F12 is connected to the aircraft 28 V lighting bus HI using 22 AWG wire. Pin
G13 is connected to aircraft lighting bus LO. Pin F13 is grounded. The maximum
current draw on the lighting bus is 0.1 amps.

3.1.1.4 Strut Switch Input

Source: Landing gear system.

Signal: Aircraft on ground when impedance is less than 10 K Ohms.

Aircraft is in the air when impedance is more than 10 K Ohms.

Certain installations may have the logic reversed. The logic sense is programmed during system
configuration setup.
This input is also supported on the ARINC 429 concentrated data bus input.

J101-I13 STRUT SWITCH IN

NOTE:
This input is debounced by approximately 10 sec-
onds for a transit.

3.1.1.5 System Valid Output

VALID = GND

INVALID = OPEN

This output is driven by a watchdog timer. In the event of a computer failure, the watchdog timer
is timed out causing an invalid condition. During an invalid condition all other valids go invalid.

Signal Type: Open collector output.

Response Time: 1.0 +0.5 seconds valid to invalid.

2.5 +0.5 seconds invalid to valid.

Current Cap.: 250 mA.

J101-M9 SYSTEM VALID OUT

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-8


J GNS-XLS

3.1.1.6 System Valid Input

VALID = GND

INVALID = OPEN

This is provided to tie the System Valid Output to the cross side FMS. This allows the VOR/DME
logic to recognize the failure of the other FMS and reconfigure the radio tuning is necessary.

Source: System Valid Output from the other FMS.

J101-M8 SYSTEM VALID IN

3.1.1.7 True/Mag Flag Input

TRUE = 28 VDC

MAG = OPEN

True mode is when the input is 18.5 - 30 Vdc. Magnetic mode is when the input is 0 - 3.5 Vdc.
Input impedance is more than 10 K Ohms.

J101-J11 TRUE/MAG IN

3.1.1.8 External Waypoint Disable Input

EXTERNAL WPT REJECTED = GND

EXTERNAL WPT ACCEPTED = OPEN

If N13 is grounded, all external waypoints (such as those entered with a radar joystick) will be re-
jected by the FMS. Pin N13 should be left open for the FMS to accept these external waypoints.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-9


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-10


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-3 GNS-XLS General System Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0002 Rev. -)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-11


J GNS-XLS

3.2 CONFIGURATION MODULE INTERFACE


The GNS-XLS Configuration Module is mounted directly to the mating connector in a socket on the
side of the connector housing. The module is programmed with installation specific option selec-
tions such as, fuel flow scaling, radio configuration, etc. When the GNS-XLS is removed from the
aircraft, the Configuration Module stays in the aircraft. This preserves the installation configuration
data and transfers this information to the new GNS-XLS.
J101-E6 CONFIG MODULE +5 VDC
J101-E7 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK
J101-E8 CONFIG MODULE DATA IN
J101-E9 CONFIG MODULE DATA OUT
J101-E10 CONFIG MODULE GROUND
J101-E11 CONFIG MODULE SELECT

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-13


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-14


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-4 GNS-XLS Configuration Module Interface


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0003 Rev. -)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-15


J GNS-XLS

3.3 POSITION UNIT INTERFACE


Four bidirectional serial data ports are provided for communication with up to four position sensor
units. Position unit #1 and #2 can be an ARINC 743 GPS or an Inertial Reference System (IRS)
configurable for HI or LO speed. These two ports use standard ARINC 429 information.
Position Unit #3 ports are for connection to an IRS/AHRS only. This port also uses standard
ARINC 429 information. The transmitter lines are shared with an ARINC 429 radio transmitter and
only operates at low speed. If an IRS input is not used at POSITION UNIT #3, magnetic heading
and associated discrete data is accepted from an ARINC 429 AHRS.
J101-K9 POSITION UNIT #3/AHRS RECEIVER (H)(HI SPEED)
J101-K10 POSITION UNIT #3/AHRS RECEIVER (L)(HI SPEED)
J101-K11 POSITION UNIT #3/RADIO 429 TRANSMITTER (H)(LO SPEED)
J101-K12 POSITION UNIT #3/RADIO 429 TRANSMITTER (L)(LO SPEED)
An ARINC 571 Inertial Navigation System (INS) may connected to at this fourth port.
J101-F5 POSITION UNIT #4 RECEIVER (H) (INS/WX/EFIS 429)
J101-F6 POSITION UNIT #4 RECEIVER (L) (INS/WX/EFIS 429)
3.3.1 ARINC 743A GPS INPUT
The GNS-XLS Enhanced (P/N 17960-0203-XXXX) may be connected to external ARINC 743 GPS
receivers. The external GPS may be used as a position sensor for terminal, enroute, and remote
operations. The external GPS cannot be used for FDE calculations, and cannot be used for TSO
C129 non-precision approaches.
A. ARINC 743A GPS Ports
Position Unit #1 or #2 ports are used for inputting ARINC 743 GPS data:
J101-K1 POSITION UNIT #1 RECEIVER (H)
J101-K2 POSITION UNIT #1 RECEIVER (L)
J101-K5 POSITION UNIT #2 RECEIVER (H)
J101-K6 POSITION UNIT #2 RECEIVER (L)
B. ARINC 743 GPS Inputs
The ARINC 743 GPS provides position information to the GNS-XLS via the position
unit 429 inputs. The following labels are received by the GNS-XLS on the input bus:

TABLE 3-1 ARINC 743A GPS Labels


INPUT LABEL DATA RATE
Latitude 110 IAW ARINC 743A
Longitude 111 "
Latitude - Fine 120 "
Longitude - Fine 121 "
UTC 150 "
Date 260 "
GNSS Sensor Status 273 "
Horizontal Figure of Merit 247 "
Ground Speed 112 "
Track 103 "

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-17


J GNS-XLS

If the 743A GPS requires information from the FMS, the FMS GAMA bus may be used to provide
data to the GPS. See section 3.17 GAMA ARINC 429 INTERFACE for GNS-XLS GAMA bus spec-
ification.
NOTE:
The GNS-XLS does not supply initial set GPS posi-
tion on the GAMA bus.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-18


J GNS-XLS

3.4 GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM


3.4.1 GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM FUNCTION
The Global Positioning System is a satellite-based radio positioning, navigation, and time-transfer
system. A computer within the GPS receiver unit continuously determines the position of all or-
biting GPS satellites from data messages broadcast by the satellites. The receiver uses this in-
formation to determine which satellites are currently in view. The GPS then translates the re-
ceived signals from the satellites in view into a three-dimensional position (latitude, longitude, and
altitude), velocity, and time. Predictable system accuracy for civil users should be about 100
meters with greater accuracy available through decryption algorithms available only to the Depart-
ment of Defense.
3.4.2 INTERNAL GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM
The primary GPS used with the GNS-XLS is the internal GPS receiver contained in the GNS-XLS.
This GPS Receiver is certified for IFR enroute and approach use and can be used for primary nav-
igation.
3.4.3 INTERNAL GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM CONNECTIONS
The only external connection to the internal GPS receiver is the antenna coax. There are three
antennas available for the internal GPS receiver. See Section 1.4.3 GPS ANTENNAS for coax
types and lengths. For correct installation the following list of instructions should be closely ad-
hered to:
A. To properly install the GPS do not exceed the maximum cable lengths specified in
TABLE 1-9 Low Gain GPS Antenna Cable Selection and TABLE 1-10 High Gain
GPS Antenna Cable Selection.
B. Do not bundle the GPS receiver coax with other transceiver coaxial cables.
C. The center conductor of the coax must be soldered to the center contact of the con-
nector. Crimp style connectors have been shown to be unreliable.
D. Use the crimp tool specified by the crimp connector manufacture for all connector
assembly.
E. Use the connectors specified in Sections 1.5.1 CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT IN-
STALLATION KIT and 1.5.2 GPS ANTENNA CONNECTOR.
F. Do not use intermediate bulkhead connectors with coaxial cabling between the an-
tenna and the CDU.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-19


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-20


J GNS-XLS

3.5 ANNUNCIATOR FUNCTIONS


ACTIVE = GND
INACTIVE = OPEN
The following six outputs are provided to annunciate GNS-XLS conditions. they may be used to
illuminate lamps, engage relays, or to be sensed directly by other systems. The term illuminate,
as used below, indicates the active low state of the annunciator output. All the annunciator outputs
described in this section originate at the GNS-XLS.
SELECTED CROSSTRACK WARN:
When illuminated, indicates that the system is tracking a course offset and parallel
to the flight plan.
APPROACH ANNUNCIATOR:
When illuminated, indicates that the system is in the approach mode of operation.
HEADING MODE ANNUNCIATOR:
When illuminated, indicates that the system is using FMS heading to control steer-
ing to the autopilot.
WAYPOINT ANNUNCIATOR:
When illuminated, indicates that the aircraft will soon arrive at the active waypoint.
DR ANNUNCIATOR:
When illuminated, indicates that the system is in the Dead Reckoning mode of op-
eration.
MESSAGE ANNUNCIATOR:
When flashing, indicates that there is an item on the Message page which requires
the pilot's attention.
3.5.1 ANNUNCIATOR REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
Message (MSG), Waypoint (WPT), Dead Reckoning (DR), Selected Crosstrack Warning, and
FMS Heading (FMS HDG) annunciators are required for all systems. Approach (APPR) annunci-
ation is needed for GPS approaches. Some EFIS systems will annunciate this, so a discrete an-
nunciator is not needed. Additional annunciator requirements will vary according to the system
configuration, operational considerations and applicable regulatory requirements.
3.5.2 ANNUNCIATOR ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

CAUTION:
Annunciators to be DC voltage only with a max-
imum of +33 Vdc. Annunciator dimming may be
by photocell or day/night switch. Do not use
panel lighting rheostat dimmed bus.
These outputs are open collector transistors. When active, the transistor is turned on and con-
ducting which provides a sink to ground for a load such as a lamp or a relay.
J101-F11 SELECTED CROSSTRACK WARN ANNUNCIATOR (250 mA max.)
J101-C4 APPROACH ANNUNCIATOR (250 mA max.)
J101-P13 HEADING MODE ANNUNCIATOR (250 mA max.)
J101-H13 WAYPOINT ANNUNCIATOR (250 mA max.)
J101-E12 DR (DEAD RECKONING) ANNUNCIATOR (250 mA max.)
J101-E13 MESSAGE ANNUNCIATOR (250 mA max.)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-21


J GNS-XLS

3.5.3 ANNUNCIATOR TEST


ACTIVE = GND (LO)
INACTIVE = OPEN (HI)
J101-B13 ANNUNCIATOR TEST IN
Applying a ground to this pin causes the above annunciators to be illuminated, and also turns on
28V Valid. The GNS-XLS must turned on for this test.
3.5.4 NAV AUTOTUNE ANNUNCIATOR
AUTOTUNE ACTIVE = GND (external pull-up)
AUTOTUNE INACTIVE = OPEN
Two output lines are provided to connect to the autotune annunciator. This annunciator indicates
when the GNS-XLS is autotuning the NAV radios. The annunciator drivers are open collector out-
puts. In dual installations these pins are connected to each other. The computer monitors the line
as an input signal and can detect if the other unit has switched radio tune states. See also Section
3.6.3 ANALOG DC TYPE.
J101-J7 NAV 1 AUTOTUNE ANNUNCIATE (250 mA max.)
J101-J9 NAV 2 AUTOTUNE ANNUNCIATE (250 mA max.)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-22


J GNS-XLS

3.6 FUEL FLOW


Fuel flow data is received from up to four engines in digital or analog form. Engines are numbered
from left to right facing forward.
Digital Inputs:
J101-H9 ENGINE #2 SIGNAL H (FFD1 H)
J101-H10 ENGINE #2 SIGNAL L (FFD1 L)
J101-H11 ENGINE #3 SIGNAL H (FFD2 H)
J101-H12 ENGINE #3 SIGNAL L (FFD2 L)
J101-I1 ENGINE #1 SIGNAL H (FFD3/R1 H)
J101-I2 ENGINE #1 SIGNAL L (FFD3/R1 L)
J101-I3 ENGINE #4 SIGNAL H (FFD4/R2 H)
J101-I4 ENGINE #4 SIGNAL L (FFD4/R2 L)
Analog Inputs:
J101-H1 ENGINE #1 SIGNAL H (FFA1 H)
J101-H2 ENGINE #1 SIGNAL L (FFA1 L)
J101-H3 ENGINE #2 SIGNAL H (FFA2 H)
J101-H4 ENGINE #2 SIGNAL L (FFA2 L)
J101-H5 ENGINE #3 SIGNAL H (FFA3 H)
J101-H6 ENGINE #3 SIGNAL L (FFA3 L)
J101-H7 ENGINE #4 SIGNAL H (FFA4 H)
J101-H8 ENGINE #4 SIGNAL L (FFA4 L)
3.6.1 FREQUENCY TYPE
A. J.E.T. Electronics
See FIGURE 3-5 Frequency Type Fuel Flow Systems.
Scale Factor:
Flowrate = 28.125 X Frequency. Where flowrate is pounds per hour and
frequency is Hertz.
Amplitude: +9 Volts, ground referenced.
Signal Type: Signal frequency is proportional to flow rate.
NOTE:
GNS-XLS must be Mod 4 or later and the Fuel Flow
indicator must be a -02.

B. Aero Systems
See FIGURE 3-5 Frequency Type Fuel Flow Systems.
Signal Levels:
High side of signal switches between 7.5 Volts and 15.0 Volts above ground
reference whereas the low side is 7.5 Volts above ground.
Output Impedance:
2 K Ohms pull up to +15 Volts.Transistor switch to 7.5 Volts.
Signal Type:
Signal frequency is proportional to flow rate.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-23


J GNS-XLS

C. Intertechnique
See FIGURE 3-5 Frequency Type Fuel Flow Systems.
Scale Factor:
Flow = [Vsig/5.0] X 17.253 X Frequency. Where flow is pounds per hour.
Vsig = Voltage of density signal.
Frequency = Frequency of rate signal.
Density Signal:
Range = 3 to 5 VDC.
Output impedance = 3.9 K Ohms.
Common mode voltage = 13 to 15 VDC.

FIGURE 3-5 Frequency Type Fuel Flow Systems

3.6.2 PULSE WIDTH TYPE


A. ELDEC
Signal Type:
Ground referenced voltage pulse. Flow rate is proportional to pulse width.
Amplitude:
VOL = 0 +2 Volts.
VOH = 12 +2 Volts.
Output Impedance:
15 K Ohms.
Repetition Time:
36 - 175 msec.
Range/Scaling:
See FIGURE 3-6 ELDEC Range/Scaling.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-24


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-6 ELDEC Range/Scaling

B. IDC
Signal Type:
Ground referenced voltage pulse. Flow rate is proportional to pulse width.
Amplitude:
VOL = 5 Volts.
VOH = 0 Volts.
Output Impedance:
10 K Ohms pull-up, 200 Ohms on ground leg.
Repetition Time:
100 - 500 msec.
Range:
0 - 8000
Range/Scaling:
80 PPH/mS.

3.6.3 ANALOG DC TYPE


A. AMETEK Indicator
Signal Type:
0.5 - 5.5 VDC ground referenced. Flow rate is proportional to voltage.
Range:
0 - 2400 PPH.
Scaling:
See FIGURE 3-7 Analog DC Range/Scaling.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-25


J GNS-XLS

B. Gull Indicator
Signal Type:
1.0 - 5.4 VDC differential. Flow rate is proportional to signal voltage.
Range:
0 - 2000 PPH.
Scaling:
See FIGURE 3-7 Analog DC Range/Scaling.
Output Impedance:
Output is buffered.
C. RAGEN Data Systems and Consolidated Airborne
Signal Type:
DC voltage output where flow rate is proportional to voltage.
Range/Scaling:
See FIGURE 3-7 Analog DC Range/Scaling.
D. Canadian Marconi
Signal Type:
DC voltage output in which the voltage is proportional to flow rate.
Output Impedance:
1 K Ohm.
Range/Scaling:
See FIGURE 3-7 Analog DC Range/Scaling.
E. Foxboro
Signal Type:
DC voltage output in which the voltage is proportional to flow rate.
Range/Scaling:
See FIGURE 3-7 Analog DC Range/Scaling.
F. Faure Herman
Signal Type:
0 - 5.0 VDC.
Range:
0 - 1323 PPH.
Scaling:
See FIGURE 3-7 Analog DC Range/Scaling.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-26


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-7 Analog DC Range/Scaling

3.6.4 ANALOG AC TYPE


A. General Electric 5 VRMS
Signal Type:
0 - 5 VRMS or 0 - 10 VRMS, 400 Hz differential signal where flow rate is
proportional to RMS voltage.
Reference:
115 VRMS nominal, 400 Hz aircraft power. The signal voltage is propor-
tional to the reference. The reference may be used to compensate the
measured signal voltage as follows: Vcomp = 115/Vref X Vsig
Source Impedance:
Low uses wide band servo feedback signal.
Range/Scaling:
See FIGURE 3-8 Analog AC Range/Scaling.

FIGURE 3-8 Analog AC Range/Scaling

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-27


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-28


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-9 GNS-XLS Fuel Flow Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0005 Rev. -, Sheet 1 of 4)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-29


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-9 GNS-XLS Fuel Flow Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0005 Rev. -, Sheet 2 of 4)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-31


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-9 GNS-XLS Fuel Flow Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0005 Rev. -, Sheet 3 of 4)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-33


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-9 GNS-XLS Fuel Flow Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0005 Rev. -, Sheet 4 of 4)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-35


J GNS-XLS

3.7 RADIO INTERFACE


The GNS-XLS will automatically tune NAV, ADF, transponder, and communication radios. This is
accomplished by serial digital data links that provide two-way communications with the radio con-
trol heads or the radios directly. Two serial data formats are supported.
A. ARINC 429 for use with Gables Series 811 control heads, Foster DME 670, and
Bendix/King Series III radios.
B. RS-422 Collins Serial Data Bus for use with Collins Proline II, Gables Series 814
control heads and Honeywell PRIMUS 2 radios.
The interface type is controlled by the configuration module.
The GNS-XLS provides two radio transmitter ports and eight radio receiver ports. The second
ARINC 429 transmitter is shared with the #3 position unit. The Flight Management System tunes
the radios only the AUTO/MAN switch is set to AUTO MODE. The FMS monitors the tuning data
for each radio via the receiver ports. This data is displayed on the FMS.
3.7.1 RADIO TUNE OUTPUTS
3.7.1.1 RS-422 Data Bus
Two RS-422 transmitter ports are provided. Identical data is transmitted on both ports.

J101-N1 RADIO 422 TRANSMIT 1 HI

J101-N2 RADIO 422 TRANSMIT 1 LO

J101-N3 RADIO 422 TRANSMIT 2 HI

J101-N4 RADIO 422 TRANSMIT 2 LO

The data rate is low speed CSDB (12.5 KBS). The following is a list of labels transmitted on these
two ports:
LABEL SDI FUNCTION RATE
30 01 REMOTE NAV TUNE #1 ACT BURST
30 10 REMOTE NAV TUNE #2 ACT BURST
31 001 REMOTE COMM TUNE #1 ACT BURST
31 010 REMOTE COMM TUNE #2 ACT BURST
31 011 REMOTE COMM TUNE #3 ACT BURST (Dual )
GNS-XLS installation only

32 00 REMOTE ADF TUNE #1 PRE BURST


32 01 REMOTE ADF TUNE #1 ACT BURST
32 10 REMOTE ADF TUNE #2 ACT BURST
33 01 REMOTE ATC TUNE #1 BURST
33 10 REMOTE ATC TUNE #2 BURST
34 00 REMOTE DME TUNE #3 BURST
34 01 REMOTE DME TUNE #5 BURST
34 10 REMOTE DME TUNE #6 BURST
34 11 REMOTE DME TUNE #4 BURST
A5 SYNC BLOCK 16.7 Hz

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-37


J GNS-XLS

3.7.1.2 ARINC 429 Data Bus


Two ARINC 429 transmitter ports are provided. Identical data is transmitted on both ports.

J101-N5 RADIO 429 TRANSMIT 1 HI

J101-N6 RADIO 429 TRANSMIT 1 LO

J101-K11 RADIO 429 TRANSMIT 2 HI

J101-K12 RADIO 429 TRANSMIT 2 LO

The data rate is low speed (12.5 KBS). All radios are tuned via a burst over an interval of 2.0 sec-
onds. The following is a list of labels transmitted on these two ports:
LABEL SDI FUNCTION
034 01 VOR #1 FREQUENCY COMMAND
034 10 VOR #2 FREQUENCY COMMAND
030 01 COMM #1 FREQUENCY COMMAND
030 10 COMM #2 FREQUENCY COMMAND
031 01 ATC #1 FREQUENCY COMMAND
031 10 ATC #2 FREQUENCY COMMAND
032 01 ADF #1 FREQUENCY COMMAND
032 10 ADF #2 FREQUENCY COMMAND
035 01 DME #1 FREQUENCY COMMAND (CHANNEL 1, 2, AND 3)
035 10 DME #2 FREQUENCY COMMAND (CHANNEL 1, 2, AND 3)

3.7.2 RADIO TUNE DATA


3.7.2.1 COMM Data Inputs
The two COMM receiver ports will accept RS-422 or ARINC 429 formats. This format is selected
during configuration.

J101-E1 COMM 1 RECEIVE HI

J101-E2 COMM 1 RECEIVE LO

J101-E3 COMM 2 RECEIVE HI

J101-E4 COMM 2 RECEIVE LO

A. RS-422 Data

Data rate:

12.5 KBS.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-38


J GNS-XLS

Signal Format:

1 Start Bit.

8 Data Bits.

1 Parity Bit - Odd parity.

1 Stop Bit.

B. ARINC 429 Data

Data Rate:

12.5 KBS.

Signal Format:

Differential, bipolar, return to zero per ARINC 429.

3.7.2.2 NAV Data Inputs


The GNS-XLS accepts serial digital NAV radio data on two DME ports and two VOR ports. These
four NAV receiver ports will accept RS-422 or ARINC 429 formats. This format is selected during
configuration.

J101-P1 VOR 1 RECEIVE HI

J101-P2 VOR 1 RECEIVE LO

J101-P9 VOR 2 RECEIVE HI

J101-P10 VOR 2 RECEIVE LO

J101-G3 DME 1 RECEIVE HI

J101-G4 DME 1 RECEIVE LO

J101-G8 DME 2 RECEIVE HI

J101-G9 DME 2 RECEIVE LO

A. RS-422 Data

The data rate is low speed CSDB (12.5 KBS). The following is description of the bus
content:

VOR labels:

LABEL SDI FUNCTION RATE


21 01 VOR #1 BRG/FREQ 10 Hz
21 10 VOR #2 BRG/FREQ 10 Hz

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-39


J GNS-XLS

DME labels:

LABEL SDI FUNCTION RATE


25 01 DME #1 CH 1 DIST/FREQ 10 Hz
25 10 DME #2 CH 2 DIST/FREQ 10 Hz
25 00 DME #3 CH 1 DIST/FREQ 10 Hz
25 00 DME #4 CH 2 DIST/FREQ 10 Hz
25 11 DME #5 CH 1 DIST/FREQ 10 Hz
25 11 DME #6 CH 2 DIST/FREQ 10 Hz

B. ARINC 429 Data

The data rate is low speed (12.5 KBS). The following is description of the bus con-
tent:

VOR labels:

LABEL FUNCTION TX INTERVAL


034 VOR/ILS FREQ 200 MS
222 VOR BEARING 50 MS

DME labels:

LABEL FUNCTION TX INTERVAL


035 DME CHANNEL FREQ (CH 1, 2, AND 3) 100 MS
202 DME CHANNEL FREQ (CH 1, 2, AND 3) 100 MS

3.7.2.3 ATC Data Inputs


Tuning confirmation is received on these pins.

J101-D5 ATC RECEIVE HI

J101-D6 ATC RECEIVE LO

3.7.2.4 ADF Data Inputs


Tuning confirmation is received on these pins.

J101-A1 ADF RECEIVE HI

J101-A2 ADF RECEIVE LO

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-40


J GNS-XLS

3.7.3 RADIO TUNE VALID


VALID = 28 VDC
INVALID = OPEN
The FMS provides an output signal to indicate when the FMS is sending valid digital serial radio
tuning data on any of the radio tune outputs. This output can be used by external equipment.
Current Capacity: 150 mA
J101-K13 RADIO TUNE VALID
3.7.4 AUTOTUNE FEATURE
The GNS-XLS will automatically tune the NAV radios when the AUTOTUNE mode is selected.
3.7.4.1 Autotune Enable Inputs
REQUEST FOR AUTOTUNE = MOMENTARY GND
There are two switch inputs on the FMS that may be connected to two AUTO/MAN switches
mounted in the cockpit. These switches provide a momentary contact to ground. Each time either
switch is depressed, the FMS will change states, either from manual radio tuning mode or auto-
tuning mode.
Autotune mode will be annunciated as described in Section 3.5.4 NAV AUTOTUNE ANNUNCIA-
TOR.
In dual systems, both NAV 1 AUTOTUNE inputs are tied together. The same is true for the NAV
2 AUTOTUNE inputs. The inputs are internally pulled up to +15 Vdc through a 4.7 k ohm resistor.

J101-J8 NAV 1 AUTOTUNE SW (PILOT RADIOS)

J101-J10 NAV 2 AUTOTUNE SW (COPILOT RADIOS)

3.7.4.2 Autotune Disable Input


Four discretes are provided to disable autotuning of the VOR and DME. These discretes may be
configured to be either all high level (28 Vdc or 0 Vdc) or all open/ground type discretes.
Each TUNE DISABLE input can be configured to specify its function (VOR SELECTED or LNAV
SELECTED) and logic state (ACTIVE HIGH = LNAV SELECTED). Unused inputs must be
strapped to enable or disable tuning as desired by the installer.
A configuration strap (AUTOTUNE STRAP 1 and 2) will select the type of AUTOTUNE DISABLE,
either 28 VDC/OPEN or GND/OPEN. With the strap connected, all inputs are defined as GND/
OPEN type.
Ground is less than 100 ohms.
Open is more than 20 k ohms to ground.

A. 28 VDC/OPEN

Straps are not connected. If any input is open or 28 Vdc, depending on configura-
tion, AUTOTUNE is disabled.

B. GND/OPEN

Straps J101-D9 to J101-D10 are connected. If any input is open or grounded, de-
pending on configuration, AUTOTUNE is disabled.

J101-M1 PILOT'S TUNE DISABLE NAV 1

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-41


J GNS-XLS

J101-M2 PILOT'S TUNE DISABLE NAV 2

J101-M3 COPILOT'S TUNE DISABLE NAV 1

J101-M4 COPILOT'S TUNE DISABLE NAV 2

J101-D9 AUTOTUNE STRAP 1 IN

J101-D10 AUTOTUNE STRAP 2 IN

3.7.5 VOR BEARING INPUTS


The GNS-XLS accepts VOR bearing information in AC resolver, DC Sine and Cosine, and/or serial
digital form.
J101-O8 VOR 1 AC REF HI
J101-O9 VOR 1 AC REF LO
J101-O10 VOR 1 BEARING COSINE HI
J101-O11 VOR 1 BEARING COSINE LO
J101-O12 VOR 1 BEARING SINE HI
J101-O13 VOR 1 BEARING SINE LO
J101-P3 VOR 2 AC REF HI
J101-P4 VOR 2 AC REF LO
J101-P5 VOR 2 BEARING COSINE HI
J101-P6 VOR 2 BEARING COSINE LO
J101-P7 VOR 2 BEARING SINE HI
J101-P8 VOR 2 BEARING SINE LO
3.7.5.1 VOR Resolver Inputs

Source: ARINC 407 resolver or equivalent. Six wires per resolver. Four wire
Sine theta/Cosine theta, two wire AC reference.

Range: 0 - 360 degrees.

Amplitude: 11.8 Vac max.

Frequency: 400 Hz.

Polarity: Increasing resolver angle = increasing bearing.

Scale Factor: One degree resolver angle = one degree radial bearing.

Index Reference: 0 degrees.

Reference Voltage: 26 Vac, 400 Hz.

Input Impedance: 20 k ohm min.

3.7.5.2 VOR DC Sine and Cosine Inputs

Source: Four wires per DC bearing port. Two wire DC Sine, two wire
DC Cosine.

Range: 0 - 360 degrees.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-42


J GNS-XLS

Amplitude: +3.0 Vdc max.

Polarity: Increasing resolver angle = increasing bearing.

Scale Factor: Theta = Arctan (Sine Vdc Input/Cosine Vdc Input).

Index Reference: 0 degrees.

Reference Voltage: None

Input Impedance: 20 k ohm min.

No connection to reference inputs.


3.7.5.3 VOR Digital Inputs
The FMS will accept digital bearing information in ARINC 429 or Collins Serial Digital Bus formats.

J101-P1 VOR 1 RECEIVE HI

J101-P2 VOR 1 RECEIVE LO

J101-P9 VOR 2 RECEIVE HI

J101-P10 VOR 2 RECEIVE LO

A. ARINC 429 VOR Bearing

Data Rate: 12.5 KBS.

Signal Format: Differential, bipolar, return to zero per ARINC 429.

B. Collins Serial Digital Bus VOR Bearing

Signal Type: Two wire differential logic per RS-422A.

Data Rate: 12.5 KBS.

Data Transfer Format:1 Start Bit.

8 Data Bits.

1 Parity Bit - Odd parity.

1 Stop Bit.

3.7.6 VOR/LOC SUPER FLAGS


VALID = 28 VDC
INVALID = OPEN
A super flag input is provided for each analog VOR receiver. The flag will go invalid for loss of
either 30 Hz reference signal or 30 Hz variable phase signal. The flag will also go invalid with a
50% reduction of both signals from the normal level due to ground station or receiver failure.
J101-P11 VOR/LOC 1 SUPER FLAG
J101-P12 VOR/LOC 2 SUPER FLAG

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-43


J GNS-XLS

3.7.7 DME SLANT RANGE INPUTS


3.7.7.1 Analog DME Pulse Pair Inputs

Source: ARINC 568-3

Pulse Width: 7 +3 microseconds.

Rise Time: 3 microseconds.

Decay Time: 7 microseconds.

Pulse Amplitude: 12 +5 volts.

Input Impedance: 20 k ohm min.

J101-G1 DME 1 RANGE C

J101-G2 DME 1 RANGE H

J101-G6 DME 2 RANGE C

J101-G7 DME 2 RANGE H

3.7.7.2 DME Digital Inputs


The FMS will accept digital DME Slant Range information in ARINC 429 or Collins Serial Digital
Bus formats.

J101-G3 DME 1 RECEIVE HI

J101-G4 DME 1 RECEIVE LO

J101-G8 DME 2 RECEIVE HI

J101-G9 DME 2 RECEIVE LO

A. ARINC 429 DME Range

Data Rate: 12.5 KBS.

Signal Format:Differential, bipolar, return to zero per ARINC 429.

B. Collins Serial Digital Bus DME Range

Signal Type: Two wire differential logic per RS-422A.

Data Rate: 12.5 KBS.

Data Transfer Format:1 Start Bit.

8 Data Bits.

1 Parity Bit - Odd parity.

1 Stop Bit.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-44


J GNS-XLS

3.7.8 DME VALID FLAG INPUTS


VALID = 28 VDC
INVALID = GND
A valid flag input is provided for each analog DME receiver.
J101-G5 DME 1 VALID
J101-G10 DME 2 VALID

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-45


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-46


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-10 GNS-XLS Radio Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0006 Rev. -, Sheet 1 of 4)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-47


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-10 GNS-XLS Radio Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0006 Rev. -, Sheet 2 of 4)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-49


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-10 GNS-XLS Radio Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0006 Rev. -, Sheet 3 of 4)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-51


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-10 GNS-XLS Radio Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0006 Rev. -, Sheet 4 of 4)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-53


J GNS-XLS

3.8 ALTITUDE INTERFACE


The GNS-XLS will accept baro corrected altitude data from one of four possible sources.
A. Two speed synchro (ARINC 565).
B. Coarse DC/Fine Resolver.
C. ARINC 575/429 serial digital data bus.
D. Concentrated ARINC 429 Data Bus.
The ARINC 575/429 and Concentrated ARINC 429 data busses are discussed in detail elsewhere
in SECTION III SYSTEM PLANNING.
3.8.1 ARINC 565 TWO SPEED SYNCHRO
Source: ARINC 407 two speed synchro.
Signal: 11.8 Vrms max., 400 Hz.
Reference: 26 Vac, 400 Hz.
Range: -1,000 ft. to 50,000 ft.
Load: 20 k ohm min.
Index Reference: Zero Foot Altitude.
Positive Direction Sense:Increasing Altitude.
Scale Factor: Coarse Synchro - 135,000 ft. per 360 degrees.
Fine Synchro - 5,000 ft. per 360 degrees.
Accuracy: -1,000 ft. to 1,000 ft. +/-17 ft.
at 10,000 ft. +/-35 ft.
at 30,000 ft. +/-55 ft.
at 50,000 ft. +/-95 ft.
J101-B1 ALTITUDE A1/ALTITUDE COARSE SYNCHRO X
J101-B3 ALTITUDE A3/ALTITUDE COARSE SYNCHRO X
J101-B2 ALTITUDE A2/ALTITUDE COARSE SYNCHRO Y
J101-B4 ALTITUDE A4/ALTITUDE COARSE SYNCHRO Y
J101-B5 ALTITUDE A5/ALTITUDE COARSE SYNCHRO Z
J101-B6 ALTITUDE A6/ALTITUDE FINE SYNCHRO X
J101-B8 ALTITUDE A8/ALTITUDE FINE SYNCHRO X
J101-B7 ALTITUDE A7/ALTITUDE FINE SYNCHRO Y
J101-B9 ALTITUDE A9/ALTITUDE FINE SYNCHRO Y
J101-B10 ALTITUDE A10/ALTITUDE FINE SYNCHRO Z
J101-C1 ALTITUDE AC REFERENCE HI
J101-C2 ALTITUDE AC REFERENCE LO

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-55


J GNS-XLS

3.8.2 COARSE DC/FINE RESOLVER


A. Coarse DC Input
Source: dc voltage is linear with altitude and proportional to a dc
reference voltage.
Range: -1,000 ft. to 50,000 ft.
Index Reference: 2.500 Vdc at sea level.
Scale Factor: 0.2 mVdc/ft.
Accuracy: Within 250 ft. of fine resolver accuracy.
Polarity: Increasing voltage = Increasing altitude.
Load: 20 k ohm min.
Reference: 15 +/ −1 Vdc.
J101-B1 ALTITUDE A1/ALTITUDE COARSE DC REFERENCE HI
J101-B2 ALTITUDE A2/ALTITUDE COARSE DC REFERENCE LO
J101-B3 ALTITUDE A3/ALTITUDE COARSE DC SIGNAL HI
J101-B4 ALTITUDE A4/ALTITUDE COARSE DC SIGNAL HI
J101-B5 ALTITUDE A5/ALTITUDE COARSE DC SIGNAL LO

B. Fine Resolver Input


Source: Four wire resolver, linear with altitude.
Resolver Sine Output: 9.0 +/ −0.5 Vac sine (Theta)
Resolver Cosine Output: 9.0 +/ −0.5 Vac cosine (Theta)
(Theta = Resolver Angle)
Range: -1,000 ft. to 50,000 ft.
Index Reference: 0 ft.
Scale Factor: 5,000 ft. per 360 degrees.
Accuracy: -1,000 ft. to 1,000 ft. +/ −17 ft.
at 10,000 ft. +/ −20 ft.
at 30,000 ft. +/ −40 ft.
at 50,000 ft. +/ −80 ft.
Polarity: Increasing Theta = Increasing altitude.
Load: 20 k ohm min.
J101-B6 ALTITUDE A6/ALTITUDE FINE RESOLVER SINE LO
J101-B7 ALTITUDE A7/ALTITUDE FINE RESOLVER SINE HI
J101-B8 ALTITUDE A8/ALTITUDE FINE RESOLVER COSINE LO
J101-B9 ALTITUDE A9/ALTITUDE FINE RESOLVER COSINE LO
J101-B10 ALTITUDE A10/ALTITUDE FINE RESOLVER COSINE HI
J101-C1 ALTITUDE AC REF. HI/ALTITUDE AC REF. HI - 26 VAC, 400 Hz
J101-C2 ALTITUDE AC REF. LO/ALTITUDE AC REF. LO - 26 VAC, 400 Hz

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-56


J GNS-XLS

3.8.3 ALTITUDE VALID FLAG INPUT


VALID = 28 VDC
INVALID = OPEN
The state of the ALT VALID discrete input indicates the validity of the analog altitude input.
J101-C3 ALTITUDE VALID

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-57


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-58


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-11 GNS-XLS Altitude Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0007 Rev. -, Sheet 1 of 2)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-59


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-11 GNS-XLS Altitude Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0007 Rev. -, Sheet 2 of 2)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-61


J GNS-XLS

3.9 VNAV INTERFACE


3.9.1 ANALOG ALTITUDE ERROR INPUT
This input is used to monitor the difference between aircraft altitude and the preselected altitude.
When the difference is within a specified amount, an altitude alert is given.
J101-A8 ALTITUDE PRESELECT ERROR RX HI
J101-A9 ALTITUDE PRESELECT ERROR RX LO
3.9.1.1 Honeywell VN-212 (P/N 4020571-904/906)

Gradient: 8.43 mV/ft (+10 V = +1185 ft.)

Polarity: Positive Vdc when the aircraft is above desired altitude.

Maximum: +10 volts.

Load: Greater than 100 k ohms from GNS-XLS.

3.9.1.2 Honeywell VN-212 (P/N 4020571-903/905)

Gradient: 4.99 mV/ft (+10 V = +2000 ft.)

Polarity: Positive Vdc when the aircraft is above desired altitude.

Maximum: +10 volts.

Load: Greater than 100 k ohms from GNS-XLS.

3.9.1.3 Bendix/King KAS 297A

Gradient: 4 mV/ft.

Polarity: Positive Vdc when the aircraft is above desired altitude.

3.9.2 ALTITUDE ERROR VALID


VALID = 28 VDC
INVALID = OPEN
A +28 Vdc altitude error valid signal is supplied to the FMS when valid altitude alert and altitude
error information is provided.
Load:10 k ohms min.
J101-A10 ALTITUDE PRESELECT ERROR VALID.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-63


J GNS-XLS

3.9.3 ANALOG ALTITUDE RATE


Signal Type: Bipolar dc voltage signal and dc reference voltage.
Signal Source: Air Data Computer.
Operating Range: 0 to +10,000 ft. per minute.
Scale Factor: 0.5 volt/1000 fpm nominal.
Reference Voltage: +12 +1.2 Vdc and -12 +1.2 Vdc where (|+V|-|-V|)<.02 Vdc.
Accuracy: +/- 30 fpm or +5% of altitude rate, whichever is greater, including
noise under 10 Hz.
Polarity: Positive for increasing altitude.
Threshold: Less than 25 fpm.
FMS Load: More than 100 k ohms.
J101-B11 ALTITUDE RATE SIGNAL RX HI
J101-B12 ALTITUDE RATE SIGNAL RX LO
J101-A11 ALTITUDE RATE REFERENCE RX HI
J101-A12 ALTITUDE RATE REFERENCE RX LO

3.9.4 VERTICAL DEVIATION OUTPUT


Source:Linear voltage generator referenced to ground return.
Range: +1 Vdc.
Accuracy: 10 mV or 10%.
Resolution: 0.5 mV.
Index Reference: Desired vertical leg.
Sense: Fly up when vertical deviation high is more positive than vertical
deviation low.
Load: Up to four parallel 1000 ohm loads.
Enroute Output: .15 mV/ft. (75 mV = 500 ft. = 1 dot). 1000 ft. = full scale.
Approach Output: .30 mV/ft. (75 mV = 250 ft. = 1 dot). 500 ft. = full scale.
J101-M6 VERTICAL DEVIATION HI
J101-M7 VERTICAL DEVIATION LO

3.9.5 VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID FLAG OUTPUT


VALID = 28 VDC
INVALID = OPEN
Load: (drive capability) 150 mA max.
Valid Enroute: Valid VNAV Path Descent.
J101-M5 VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-64


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-12 GNS-XLS VNAV Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0008 Rev. -

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-65


J GNS-XLS

3.10 TRUE AIRSPEED INTERFACE


True airspeed information is accepted from one of five sources.
A. TAS Synchro - ARINC 545.
B. TAS AC - ARINC 565, Output No. 1.
C. TAS DC - ARINC 565, Output No. 4.
D. TAS Digital Air Data System - ARINC 575/429.
E. Concentrated ARINC 429 Input Bus.
ARINC 575/429 and Concentrated ARINC 429 inputs are discussed elsewhere in SECTION III
SYSTEM PLANNING.

3.10.1 TAS SYNCHRO - ARINC 545


Source: ARINC 407 synchro from ARINC 545 Air Data System.
Range: 150 - 650 knots.
Accuracy: +4 knots or 1%, whichever is greater.
Resolution: 1 knot.
Index Reference: 200 knots = 0 degrees.
Polarity: Increasing angle = Increasing airspeed.
Scale Factor: 36 degrees per 100 knots.
Signal Voltage: 11.8 Vrms max.
Reference Voltage: 26 Vrms, 400 Hz.
Load: 25 k ohm min.
J101-O1 TAS AC REF HI/TAS REF HI
J101-O2 TAS AC REF LO/TAS REF LO
J101-O3 TAS D1/TAS SYNCHRO X
J101-O5 TAS D3/TAS SYNCHRO X
J101-O4 TAS D2/TAS SYNCHRO Y
J101-O6 TAS D4/TAS SYNCHRO Y
J101-O7 TAS D5/TAS SYNCHRO Z

3.10.2 TAS AC - ARINC 565, OUTPUT NO. 1


Source: Analog ac voltage generator (linear transformer or equivalent).
Range: 115 - 599 knots.
Accuracy: +4 knots.
Resolution: 1 knot.
Index Reference: Phase such that reversal will occur at 100 knots with signal in
phase for increasing TAS and 180 degrees out of phase for
decreasing TAS.
Scale Factor: 46.6 knots per 1 Vrms +1%.
Reference Voltage: 11.8 Vac, 400 Hz.
Load: 25 k ohm min.
J101-O5 TAS D3/TAS AC SIGNAL HI
J101-O6 TAS D4/TAS AC SIGNAL HI

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-67


J GNS-XLS

J101-O7 TAS D5/TAS AC SIGNAL LO


J101-O3 TAS D1/TAS AC REF HI
J101-O1 TAS AC REF HI/TAS AC REF HI
J101-O4 TAS D2/TAS AC REF LO
J101-O2 TAS AC REF LO/TAS AC REF LO

3.10.3 TAS DC - ARINC 565, OUTPUT NO. 4


Source: DC amplifier having the low side of the circuit grounded inside the
Air Data System unit.
Range: 115 - 599 knots.
Accuracy: +4 knots.
Index Reference: 0 knots = 0.00 volts.
Polarity: Increasing signal voltage = Increasing speed.
Scale Factor: TAS = 3223.87 X Vsig/Vref (Knots/hr.).
Reference Voltage: 20 +2 Vdc with not more than 50 mVrms of ripple.
Load: 25 k ohm min.
J101-O5 TAS D3/TAS DC SIGNAL HI
J101-O6 TAS D4/TAS DC SIGNAL HI
J101-O7 TAS D5/TAS DC SIGNAL LO
J101-O3 TAS D1/TAS DC REF HI
J101-O4 TAS D2/TAS DC REF LO

3.10.4 TAS VALID FLAG INPUT


VALID = 28 VDC
INVALID = OPEN
This input indicates that valid analog TAS information is being sent.
J101-N11 TAS VALID

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-68


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-13 GNS-XLS True Airspeed Interconnect (ARINC 545)


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0009 Rev. -, Sheet 1 of 3)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-69


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-13 GNS-XLS True Airspeed Interconnect (ARINC 565 AC)


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0009 Rev. -, Sheet 2 of 3)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-71


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-13 GNS-XLS True Airspeed Interconnect (ARINC 565 DC)


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0009 Rev. -, Sheet 3 of 3)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-73


J GNS-XLS

3.11 MAGNETIC HEADING INTERFACE


The GNS-XLS accepts analog heading information from the compass system or digital heading in-
formation from an Inertial Reference System or AHRS. The digital inputs are discussed elsewhere
in SECTION III SYSTEM PLANNING.

3.11.1 SYNCHRO HEADING INPUT


Source: ARINC 407 transmitter synchro (or equivalent).
Range: 0 - 360 degrees.
Accuracy: +/-2 degrees.
Index Reference: 0 degrees = North.
Polarity: Increasing synchro angle = Increasing heading.
Scale Factor: 1 degree = 1 degree.
Signal Voltage: 11.8 Vrms max.
Reference Voltage: 26 Vrms, 400 Hz.
Resolution: 0.1 degree.
Load: 40 k ohm min.
J101-J4 MAGNETIC HEADING X
J101-J5 MAGNETIC HEADING Y
J101-J6 MAGNETIC HEADING Z
J101-J2 MAGNETIC HEADING AC REF HI
J101-J3 MAGNETIC HEADING AC REF LO

3.11.2 HEADING VALID FLAG INPUT


VALID = 28 VDC
INVALID = OPEN
The state of this input indicates the validity of the analog heading information.
Source: Compass System.
Load: 10 k ohm min.
J101-J1 MAGNETIC HEADING VALID

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-75


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-76


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-14 GNS-XLS Magnetic Heading Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0010 Rev. -)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-77


J GNS-XLS

3.12 HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR INTERFACE


The GNS-XLS provides outputs to drive the HSI and the Cross Track Deviation Indicator. Three
wire synchro and four wire resolver outputs are provided.

3.12.1 BEARING OUTPUTS


3.12.1.1 Three Wire Synchro Output
Output Type: Three wire synchro per ARINC 407.
Range: 0 - 360 degrees.
Resolution: 0.1 degree min.
Load: Three paralleled synchro control transformers.
Reference Input: 26 Vrms, 400 Hz.
Signal Output: 0 to 11.8 Vrms, 400 Hz.
J101-L1 HSI BEARING AC REF HI
J101-L2 HSI BEARING AC REF LO
J101-L3 HSI BEARING B1/HSI BEARING X
J101-L4 HSI BEARING B2/HSI BEARING Z
J101-L5 HSI BEARING B3/HSI BEARING Y
J101-L6 HSI BEARING B4/JUMPER
J101-L8 HSI BEARING B6/JUMPER
3.12.1.2 Four Wire Resolver Output
Output Type: Four wire resolver. Sine and Cosine vary from 0 to 7.9 Vrms.
Range: 0 - 360 degrees.
Resolution: 0.1 degree min.
Load: 100 ohm min. each output.
Reference Input: 26 Vrms, 400 Hz.
J101-L1 HSI BEARING AC REF HI
J101-L2 HSI BEARING AC REF LO
J101-L7 HSI BEARING B5/HSI BEARING SINE HI
J101-L5 HSI BEARING B3/HSI BEARING SINE LO
J101-L6 HSI BEARING B4/HSI BEARING COSINE HI
J101-L4 HSI BEARING B2/HSI BEARING COSINE LO

3.12.2 COURSE OUTPUTS


3.12.2.1 Three Wire Synchro Output
Output Type: Three wire synchro per ARINC 407.
Range: 0 - 360 degrees.
Resolution: 0.1 degree min.
Load: Three paralleled synchro control transformers.
Reference Input: 26 Vrms, 400 Hz.
Signal Output: 0 to 11.8 Vrms, 400 Hz.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-79


J GNS-XLS

J101-L9 HSI COURSE AC REF HI


J101-L10 HSI COURSE AC REF LO
J101-L11 HSI COURSE C1/HSI COURSE X
J101-L12 HSI COURSE C2/HSI COURSE Z
J101-L13 HSI COURSE C3/HSI COURSE Y
J101-M11 HSI COURSE C4/JUMPER
J101-M13 HSI COURSE C6/JUMPER
3.12.2.2 Four Wire Resolver Output
Output Type: Four wire resolver. Sine and Cosine vary from 0 to 7.9 Vrms.
Range: 0 - 360 degrees.
Resolution: 0.1 degree min.
Load: 100 ohm min. each output.
Reference Input: 26 Vrms, 400 Hz.
Signal Output: 0 to 11.8 Vrms, 400 Hz.
J101-L9 HSI COURSE AC REF HI
J101-L10 HSI COURSE AC REF LO
J101-M12 HSI COURSE C5/HSI COURSE SINE HI
J101-L13 HSI COURSE C3/HSI COURSE SINE LO
J101-M11 HSI COURSE C4/HSI COURSE COSINE HI
J101-L12 HSI COURSE C2/HSI COURSE COSINE LO

3.12.3 CROSS TRACK DEVIATION OUTPUT


Output Type: DC voltage referenced to ground (C).
Index Reference: Desired horizontal track.
Positive Voltage: Fly right to intercept track.
Range: +150 mVdc.
Resolution: 1 mVdc.
Load: 1 k ohm.
Scale Factor:
Enroute: 30 +2 mV/nmi. 5 nmi full scale deflection.
Terminal: 150 +2 mV/nmi. 1 nmi full scale deflection.
Non-Precision Appr: 500 +2 mV/nmi. 0.3 nmi full scale deflection.
J101-D12 CROSS TRACK DEVIATION H
J101-D11 CROSS TRACK DEVIATION C

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-80


J GNS-XLS

3.12.4 TO/FROM FLAG OUTPUT


Output Type: Voltage generator referenced to ground.
Index Reference: Next waypoint.
Positive Direction
Sense: TO/FROM FLAG positive (+) indicates FROM side of waypoint.
Load: Two parallel 200 ohm loads, each having a sensitivity of
200 microamps.
J101-I5 TO/FROM FLAG
J101-I6 TO/FROM FLAG GRND

3.12.5 HSI VALID FLAG OUTPUT (NAV WARN)


VALID = 28 VDC
INVALID = OPEN
If the FMS detects a failure in the input signals or internal circuitry that may effect the lateral nav-
igation outputs, the valid flag will go invalid.
Output Type: Single wire discrete to NAV Warn Flag on HSI
Load: (drive capability) 150 mA max.
J101-M10 HSI VALID/NAV WARN

3.12.6 SELECTED CROSS TRACK WARN


VALID = GND
INVALID = OPEN
Signal Type: Open collector output.
Current Capacity: 250 mA.
J101-F11 SELECT CROSS TRACK WARN

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-81


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-82


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-15 GNS-XLS Horizontal Situation Indicator Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0011 Rev. AA, Sheet 1 of 3)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-83


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-15 GNS-XLS Horizontal Situation Indicator Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0011 Rev. AA, Sheet 2 of 3)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-85


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-15 GNS-XLS Horizontal Situation Indicator Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0011 Rev. AA, Sheet 3 of 3)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-87


J GNS-XLS

3.13 COLLINS EFIS-85 INTERFACE


The GNS-XLS will accept waypoint data from the Collins EFIS-85 though this port.
Data Rate: 12.5 kb/s.
Signal Types: RS-422A.
Signal Format: 1 start bit.
8 data bits.
1 parity bit - odd parity.
1 stop bit.
J101-F3 EFIS RS-422 RECEIVE HI
J101-F4 EFIS RS-422 RECEIVE LO

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-89


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-90


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-16 GNS-XLS with Collins EFIS-85 Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0012 Rev. -)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-91


J GNS-XLS

3.14 AFIS INTERFACE


The GNS-XLS provides a bidirectional data link to the AFIS system. The data rate is 22.5 k Baud.
The data structure is defined as follows:
No Parity.
8 Data Bits.
2 Stop Bits.
J101-A4 AFIS RECEIVE HI
J101-A5 AFIS RECEIVE LO
J101-A6 AFIS TRANSMIT HI
J101-A7 AFIS TRANSMIT LO

3.14.1 AFIS ON CONTROL


A 28 VDC switched output is provided as the AFIS ON control.
AFIS ON: 18 - 32 VDC.
AFIS OFF: 0 - 5 VDC.
J101-A3 AFIS ON CONTROL

3.14.2 AFIS WEATHER GRAPHICS


GNS-XLS part numbers 17960-0203-XXXX allow display of weather graphics through the AFIS
system. The 5115 RPU is used to translate the DMU digital data to GNS-XLS RGB format.
GNS-XLS pins for the AFIS weather graphics are as follows:
J101-F7 WX RS 422 RECEIVE HI
J101-F8 WX RS 422 RECEIVE LO
J101-F9 WX RS 422 TRANSMIT HI
J101-F10 WX RS 422 TRANSMIT LO
J101-R1 Red Hi
J101-R2 Red Lo
J101-R3 Green Hi
J101-R4 Green Lo
J101-R5 Blue Hi
J101-R6 Blue Lo
J101-R7 Horizontal Sync
J101-R8 Video Ground
J101-R9 Vertical Sync
Data supplied by the GNS-XLS to the Weather Graphics RPU is listed below. Format is RS-422,
9600 Baud, 8 data bits, no parity, one stop bit.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-93


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-2 GNS-XLS Data to Weather Graphics RPU


(Sheet 1 of 5)

Item D. Item Format (byte) (dddd) Field Item Description


(id) 123456789012345678901234567 89012 Width
(bytes)
A N dd mmhh 9 Current Latitude
N: Direction
N = North
S = South
dd = degrees
mm = minutes
hh = hundredths if a minute
The scale provided will be to
tenths of a minute.
Transmitted 1/sec.
B W ddd mmhh 10 Current Longitude
W: Direction
W = West
E = East
ddd = degrees
mm = minutes
hh = hundredths of minutes
The scale provided will be to
tenths of a minute.
Transmitted 1/sec.
a +nnnnnp 7 System altitude - meters
+: + = above sea level
- = below sea level; value
associated with below will
be dashed out.
nnnnn: Value in meters to the
nearest 30 meter
resolution. (The DMU field
width is 3 bytes and scales
to 100 feet.)
p: P = Pressure Altitude
- = GPS Altitude
` ' = undetermined (space)
Transmitted 1/sec.)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-94


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-2 GNS-XLS Data to Weather Graphics RPU


(Sheet 2 of 5)

Item D. Item Format (byte) (dddd) Field Item Description


(id) 123456789012345678901234567 89012 Width
(bytes)
r 0TccGdnnnns 11 Route Status (Flight Plan)
0: = 0
T: Type
D = Direct destination
R = Route
cc: Number of waypoints in route
(01-25)
G: G = GridNav route
- = Normal route
d: GridNav Turn direction
L = Initial left turn
R = Initial right turn
- = Not applicable
nnnn: GridNav spacing
s: GridNav Spacing type
f = feet
m = meters
Transmitted 1/ < 5 sec.
w DdsWWWWWxxxyyyymm 17 Route waypoint
Route waypoints are binary packed
as:
Byte 0:
ASCII `w'
Bytes 1-2:
dd = Waypoint number (01-25) in
ASCII characters.
Byte 3:
s = Sequence Number
xawnnnnn (binary)
x = Undefined
a = 1 if this waypoint is the
active waypoint
w = 1 if last waypoint of flight
plan
nnnnn = Waypoint number
(1-25 in binary)
Bytes 4-8:
WWWWW = ASCII identifier

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-95


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-2 GNS-XLS Data to Weather Graphics RPU


(Sheet 3 of 5)

Item D. Item Format (byte) (dddd) Field Item Description


(id) 123456789012345678901234567 89012 Width
(bytes)
Bytes 9-11:
xxx = Waypoint latitude
(byte 9) sddddddd
(byte 10) xxmmmmmm
(byte 11) xhhhhhhh
x = Undefined
s = 0 for North Latitude,
1 for South Latitude
ddddddd = Latitude degrees
hhhhhhh = Latitude hundredths
of minutes
Bytes 12-15:
(binary)
yyyy = Waypoint Longitude
(byte 12) sxxxnnnn
(byte 13) dddddddd
(byte 14) xxmmmmmm
(byte 15) xhhhhhh
s = 0 for East Longitude
1 for West Longitude
x = Undefined
nnnn = Waypoint Type
0 = Dbase Airport
1 = Dbase VOR
2 = Dbase NBD
3 = Dbase Terminal
Intersection
4 = Dbase Enroute Intersection
5 = User Waypoint Table
Latitude/Longitude
6 = User Waypoint Table
Radial/Distance
7 = User Waypoint Table
Database Airport
8 = User Waypoint Table
Dbase VOR
9 = User Waypoint Table
Dbase NDB

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-96


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-2 GNS-XLS Data to Weather Graphics RPU


(Sheet 4 of 5)

Item D. Item Format (byte) (dddd) Field Item Description


(id) 123456789012345678901234567 89012 Width
(bytes)
10 = User Waypoint Table
Dbase Terminal
Intersection
11 = User Waypoint Table
Dbase Enroute Intersection
12 = Route Latitude/Longitude
dddddddd = Longitude degrees
mmmmmm = Longitude minutes
Bytes 16-17:
mm = Waypoint Magnetic Variation
(byte 0) Least significant byte
(byte 1) Most significant byte
Data are in two's complement
binary, in sixteenths of a
degree. Negative values are
westerly variation.
Transmitted 1/ < 5 sec.
m dd/mm/yy 8 date
dd = day
mm = month
yy = year
Transmitted 1/ < 10 min.
t hh:mm:ss 8 time (UTC)
hh = hour
mm = minute
ss = second
Second is not presently available
to DMU and will be set to 00.
Transmitted 1/ < 10 min.
X D 1 d = (See Key Codes table)
Y Dddddddddd 10 d = Text Message Request
character; Total characters
represent a Request string;
Spaces used to fill remaining
bytes.
(See the Text Message
Request table).

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-97


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-2 GNS-XLS Data to Weather Graphics RPU


(Sheet 5 of 5)

Item D. Item Format (byte) (dddd) Field Item Description


(id) 123456789012345678901234567 89012 Width
(bytes)
Z Sn 2 Keep Alive
s: source
D = DMU
F = FMS
n: node number (FMS identifica
tion)
0 = DMU provided Keep Alive
1 = FMS node #1 provided
Keep Alive
2 = FMS node #2 provided
Keep Alive
3 = FMS node #3 provided
Keep Alive
Transmitted 1/10 sec.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-98


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-17 GNS-XLS AFIS Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0013 Rev. -)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-99


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-18 DMU to ARNAV RPU, and GNS-XLS Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01712-4017 Rev C)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-101


J GNS-XLS

3.15 AUTOPILOT INTERFACE


A roll steering signal is provided for input to the autopilot. For GPS approaches FMS Roll Steering
must be used. Also, valid Auto TAS input and valid heading must be present for Roll Steering to
be operational.
3.15.1 ROLL STEERING AC OUTPUT
Source: Isolation transformer or equivalent. Both sides are isolated from
ground.
Range: 0 to +12 Vac (+30.5 degrees).
Resolution: Less than 40 mV.
Accuracy: 1% full scale.
Index Reference: Zero feet cross track distance and zero degree track angle error.
Positive Direction
Sense: Command signal is in phase with the 26 Vac, 400 Hz autopilot
reference for a right turn.
Scale Factor: 0.393 Vrms per degree of roll command.
Load Capacity: k ohm min.
Steering: Roll Command (degrees) = K1 x (cross track distance) + K2 x
(ground speed) x (track angle error)
Where:
Cross Track Distance = feet.
Ground Speed = feet/second.
Track Angle Error = degrees.
K1 and K2 are switched as a function of Track Intercept or ON Track.
When on track, the gains are modified further as a function of latitude,
aircraft heading, and ground speed.
J101-D7 AUTOPILOT AC REF HI
J101-D8 AUTOPILOT AC REF LO
J101-N7 ROLL STEERING HI
J101-N8 ROLL STEERING LO
3.15.2 ROLL STEERING VALID
VALID = 28 VDC
INVALID = OPEN
If the FMS detects an error in the inputs that would degrade the steering output signals, this will
go invalid.
Current Capacity: 150 mA max.
J101-N9 ROLL STEERING VALID

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-103


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-104


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-19 GNS-XLS Autopilot Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0014 Rev. -)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-105


J GNS-XLS

3.16 INTRA-SYSTEM INTERFACE


Dual GNS-XLS installations require a connection between the two systems to cross fill flight plan
data, exchange NAV sensor data, and resolve master/slave logic. A bidirectional data bus is pro-
vided to satisfy this requirement. This data bus has the electrical characteristics of ARINC 429,
but communicates with a proprietary data format. Both the transmitter and receiver operate at a
high speed (100 kB/s) data rate. Label information is as follows:
PARAMETER LABEL INTERVAL
Message Word #1 010 Demand
Message Word #2 011 Demand
Message Word #3 012 Demand
Message Word #4 013 Demand
Message Word #5 014 Demand
Message ACK Code 005 Demand
Message Word #6 015 Demand
Message Word #7 016 Demand
Message Word #8 017 Demand
Message Word #9 018 Demand
Message Word #10 019 Demand
Message Word #11 020 Demand
XFILL Status Flags 001 100 mS
VPU Sensor Data 356 200 mS
VPU Navaids 377 200 mS

J101-I9 INTRA-SYSTEM RECEIVE HI


J101-I10 INTRA-SYSTEM RECEIVE LO
J101-I11 INTRA-SYSTEM TRANSMIT HI
J101-I12 INTRA-SYSTEM TRANSMIT LO

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-107


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-108


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-20 GNS-XLS Intra-System Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0015 Rev. -)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-109


J GNS-XLS

3.17 GAMA ARINC 429 INTERFACE


The GNS-XLS provides a GAMA 429 port to transmit map data, weather radar information, and
steering commands to the IC-600. The labels are configurable for high or low speed data rate.
The receiving equipment should allow a label to be absent for at least three typical intervals before
flagging it as invalid. This will protect against transient noise on the bus.
3.17.1 HIGH SPEED BUS
TABLE 3-3 GAMA ARINC 429 High Speed Bus Output
(Sheet 1 of 3)

NAME LABEL FORMAT DATA RATE


Discrete
GPS Discrete Word 1 261 Collins Bits 01-08 = Label
Bits 09-10 = SDI
Bits 11-12 = Spare
Bits 13-19 = Reserved
Bit 20 = Spare
Bit 21 = Dev Scaling in Transition
Bit 22 = Lin/Ang (Final Approach)
Bit 23 = Appr Integrity (Final Approach)
Bit 24 = GPS Integrity
Bits 25-27 = GPS Annunciation
27(0), 26(0), 25(0) - Enroute
27(0), 26(0), 25(1) - Terminal
27(0), 26(1), 25(0) - Approach
27(1), 26(0), 25(0) - Oceanic
Bits 28-29 = Spare
Bits 30-31 = SSM
31(0), 30(0) - Normal Operation
31(0), 30(1) - No Computed Data
31(1), 30(0) - Functional Test
Discrete
Status Word 275 Octal Bit 11 = 1 for WPT ALERT 400 msec
Bit 12 = 1 for DR
Bit 16 = 1 for APPROACH MODE
Bit 17 = 1 for FMS HEADING
Bit 23 = 1 for TO Flag
Bit 24 = 1 for FROM Flag
Bit 25 = 1 for SXTK WARN Condition
Bit 27 = 1 for Message Alert
Bit 28 = 1 for TRUE
Bit 28 = 0 for MAG
Bit 29 = 1 for HSI VALID Condition*
Bit 29 = 0 for NAV WARN Condition
Bit 30-31 = 1 1 for VALID SSM
Bit 32 = Parity (Odd)
*If Option 1, Used, is selected on the EFIS HSI WARN Page during system configuration programming, the
following conditions will set Bit 29 to Invalid (0):
1. No active leg is defined.
2. System is currently in DR mode.
3. Cross Track Deviation is greater than 128NM.
4 A "VERIFY POSITION" message is displayed.
5. A "VAR WARNING - MAN VAR REQ'D" message is displayed.
If Option 2, Disabled, is selected on the EFIS HSI WARN Page, the above conditions will not set Bit 29
to Invalid.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-111


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-3 GAMA ARINC 429 High Speed Bus Output


(Sheet 2 of 3)

NAME LABEL FORMAT DATA RATE


Discrete
Lateral Scale Factor 326 BNR Bits 01-08 = Label
Bits 09-10 = SDI
Bits 11-13 = PAD
Bits 14-28 = Binary Full Scale Dis
tance (ft)
Bit 29 = Sign
Bits 30-31 = SSM
Bit 32 = Parity (Odd)
Flight Plan Transfer 100 msec per
Record all in record
Data Record Header 074 Octal BNR per GAMA 429
BNR per GWS special format
Active WPT 075 Octal BCD per GAMA 429
FROM/TO Data
Message Checksum 113 Octal BNR per GAMA 429
Station Type, 300 Octal BNR per GAMA 429
class, freq
Message Characters 301 Octal BNR per 100-016786
7-9
Message Characters 302 Octal BNR per 100-016786
10-12
Message length, 303 Octal BNR per GAMA 429
type,number BNR per GWS special format
Message Characters 304 Octal BNR per GAMA 429
1-3
Message Characters 305 Octal BNR per GAMA 429
4-6
Waypoint Latitude 306 Octal BNR per GAMA 429
Waypoint Longitude 307 Octal BNR per GAMA 429
Desired Track 114 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 40 msec
Bearing to Waypoint 115 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 40 msec
BNR per GWS special format
Cross Track Distance 116 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 40 msec
Vertical Deviation 117 Octal BNR per GAMA 429 40 msec
Roll Command 121 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 100 msec
GMT 125 Octal BCD per ARINC 429 100 msec
Magnetic Variation 147 Octal BNR per GAMA 429 1 sec
Wind on Nose 163 Octal BNR per GAMA 429 100 msec
Baro Corrected 204 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 40 msec
Altitude
True Airspeed 210 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 100 msec
Static Air Temp (If 213 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
received from digital
Air Data Computer)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-112


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-3 GAMA ARINC 429 High Speed Bus Output


(Sheet 3 of 3)

NAME LABEL FORMAT DATA RATE


Distance to GO 251 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 200 msec
Time to Go 252 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 200 msec
Date 260 Octal BCD per GAMA 429 1 sec
FMS NAV Mode-Type 2 266 Octal Discrete 400 msec
Bits 01-08 = Label
Bits 09-10 = SDI
Bits 11-14 = Spare
Bit 15 = 1 for NAV Accuracy High
Bit 15 = 0 for NAV Accuracy Low
Bits 16-18 = NAV Mode
18(0) 17(0) 16(0) = Dead Reckoning
18(0) 17(0) 16(1) = GPS
18(0) 17(1) 16(0) = Inertial only
18(0) 17(1) 16(1) = VLF/Omega
18(1) 17(0) 16(0) = VOR/DME
18(1) 17(0) 16(1) = VLF/Omega/Inertial
18(1) 17(1) 16(0) = DME/DME
19(1) 17(1) 16(1) = No NAV
Bits 19-29 = Spare
Bits 30-31 = SSM
Bit 32 = Parity (Odd)
Present Position 310 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 200 msec
(Lat)
Present Position 311 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 200 msec
(Lon)
Groundspeed 312 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 40 msec
Track Angle (True) 313 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 40 msec
True Heading 314 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 40 msec
Wind Speed 315 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 100 msec
Wind Direction 316 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 100 msec
Magnetic Heading 320 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 40 msec
Drift Angle 321 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 40 msec
Distance to 351 Octal BNR per GAMA 429 1 sec
Destination
Time to Destination 352 Octal BNR per GAMA 429 1 sec
Vendor/Unit ID 371 Octal BNR per GAMA 429 1 sec
MRP Latitude 264 Octal BNR per GWS special format 1 sec
(Only on BAe 146 configuration)
MRP Longitude 164 Octal BNR per GWS special format 1 sec
(only on BAe 146 configuration)
BCD Distance to the 001 Octal BCD per GWS special format 1 sec
TO Waypoint (Only on BAe 146 configuration)
Distance to Bisector 276 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
Heading Mode ANNC 272/373 Octal ASCII per GAMA 429 500 ms

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-113


J GNS-XLS

3.17.2 LOW SPEED BUS

TABLE 3-4 GAMA ARINC 429 Low Speed Bus Output


(Sheet 1 of 3)

NAME LABEL FORMAT DATA RATE


Flight Plan Transfer 100 msec per
Record all in record
Data Record Header 074 Octal BNR per GAMA 429
Active WPT 075 Octal BCD per GAMA 429
FROM/TO Data
Message Checksum 113 Octal BNR per GAMA 429
Station Type, 300 Octal BNR per GAMA 429
class, freq
Message Characters 301 Octal BNR per 100-016786
7-9
Message Characters 302 Octal BNR per 100-016786
10-12
Message length, 303 Octal BNR per GAMA 429
type,number BNR per GWS special format
Message Characters 304 Octal BNR per GAMA 429
1-3
Message Characters 305 Octal BNR per GAMA 429
4-6
Waypoint Latitude 306 Octal BNR per GAMA 429
Waypoint Longitude 307 Octal BNR per GAMA 429
Desired Track 114 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
Bearing to Waypoint 115 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
Cross Track Distance 116 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
Vertical Deviation 117 Octal BNR per GAMA 429 400 msec
Roll Command 121 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
GMT 125 Octal BCD per ARINC 429 1 sec
Magnetic Variation 147 Octal BNR per GAMA 429 400 msec
Wind on Nose 163 Octal BNR per GAMA 429 400 msec
Baro Corrected 204 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
Altitude
True Airspeed 210 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
Static Air Temp 213 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
(If received from
digital Air Data
Computer)
Distance to GO 251 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
Time to Go 252 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-114


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-4 GAMA ARINC 429 Low Speed Bus Output


(Sheet 2 of 3)

NAME LABEL FORMAT DATA RATE


Discrete
GPS Discrete Word 1 261 Collins Bits 01-08 = Label
Bits 09-10 = SDI
Bits 11-12 = Spare
Bits 13-19 = Reserved
Bit 20 = Spare
Bit 21 = Dev Scaling in Transition
Bit 22 = Lin/Ang (Final Approach)
Bit 23 = Appr Integrity (Final
Approach)
Bit 24 = GPS Integrity
Bits 25-27 = GPS Annunciation
27(0), 26(0), 25(0) - Enroute
27(0), 26(0), 25(1) -
Terminal
27(0), 26(1), 25(0) -
Approach
27(1), 26(0), 25(0) - Oceanic
Bits 28-29 = Spare
Bits 30-31 = SSM
31(0), 30(0) - Normal
Operation
31(0), 30(1) - No Computed
Data
31(1), 30(0) - Functional
Test
FMS NAV Mode-Type 2 266 Octal Discrete 400 msec
Bits 01-08 = Label
Bits 09-10 = SDI
Bits 11-14 = Spare
Bit 15 = 1 for NAV Accuracy High
Bit 15 = 0 for NAV Accuracy Low
Bits 16-18 = NAV Mode
18(0) 17(0) 16(0) = Dead Reckoning
18(0) 17(0) 16(1) = GPS
18(0) 17(1) 16(0) = Inertial only
18(0) 17(1) 16(1) = VLF/Omega
18(1) 17(0) 16(0) = VOR/DME
18(1) 17(0) 16(1) = VLF/Omega/Inertial
18(1) 17(1) 16(0) = DME/DME
19(1) 17(1) 16(1) = No NAV
Bits 19-29 = Spare
Bits 30-31 = SSM
Bit 32 = Parity (Odd)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-115


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-4 GAMA ARINC 429 Low Speed Bus Output


(Sheet 3 of 3)

NAME LABEL FORMAT DATA RATE


Status Word 275 Octal Discrete 400 msec
Bit 11 = 1 for WPT ALERT
Bit 12 = 1 for DR
Bit 16 = 1 for APPROACH MODE
Bit 17 = 1 for HEADING MODE
Bit 23 = 1 for TO Flag
Bit 24 = 1 for FROM Flag
Bit 25 = 1 for SXTK WARN Condition
Bit 27 = 1 for MSG
Bit 28 = 1 for TRUE
Bit 28 = 0 for MAG
Bit 29 = 1 for HSI Valid Condition
Bit 29 = 0 for NAV WARN Condition
Bit 30-31 = 1 1 for VALID SSM
Bit 32 = Parity (Odd)
Date 260 Octal BCD per GAMA 429 10 sec
Present Position (Lat) 310 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
Present Position (Lon) 311 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
Groundspeed 312 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
Track Angle (True) 313 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
True Heading 314 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
Wind Speed 315 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
Wind Direction 316 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
Magnetic Heading 320 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
Drift Angle 321 Octal BNR per ARINC 429 400 msec
Distance to 351 Octal BNR per GAMA 429 1 sec
Destination
Time to Destination 352 Octal BNR per GAMA 429 1 sec
Vendor/Unit ID 371 Octal BNR per GAMA 429 1 sec
NOTE: The Low Speed PDCS data rates are the same as the Low Speed data rate shown in this
table with the following exceptions:
Groundspeed = 40 msec.
Distance = 200 msec.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-116


J GNS-XLS

3.17.3 BAE 146 EFIS CONFIGURATION-HIGH SPEED BUS


In addition to all labels defined in paragraph 3.17.1 HIGH SPEED BUS, the following labels are
also transmitted when configured for the BAe 146 EFIS.
TABLE 3-5 Additional GAMA ARINC 429 Outputs for BAe 146 Configuration
NAME LABEL FORMAT DATA RATE
BCD Distance to TO 001 BCD per GAMA 429 1 Sec
Waypoint
Map Reference Point 264 BNR per ARINC 429 1 Sec
Latitude
Map Reference Point 164 BNR per ARINC 429 1 Sec
Longitude
NOTES: 1. Labels 115-Bearing to Waypoint, 275-Status Discretes, 074-Data Record
Header and 303-Message/Length/Type/Number have a modified GAMA 429
format when configured for the BAe 146 EFIS.
2. The Honeywell EFIS Control Panel used in the BAe 146 transmits two (2) ARINC
429 labels to the GNS-XLS. To receive these labels (272 - EFIS Discrete Mode
Word, and 273 - EFIS Discrete Range Word) on the INX/WX/EFIS 429 receive
bus (J101-F5 and J101-F6), the GNS-XLS must be configured for NO Concentrated
Data Bus, and there must not be any INS/IRS position units configured.
If a Concentrated Data Bus and/or INS/IRS position units are configured, the
EFIS discrete word labels will be received by the GNS-XLS on the DADC/WX/EFIS
429 receive bus (J101-F1 and J101 F2).
Refer to SECTION IV POST INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION AND CHECK OUT for information
regarding configuration options.
When the BAe 146 Configuration selection is made, the value on the GAMA Label 116 for Lateral
Course Deviation Indication is scaled so that Legacy Honeywell EFIS will display the values re-
quired by TSO C129. Label 326 puts out a scaling reference value for all EFIS configurations.

TABLE 3-6 Additional 429 Outputs for BAe 146 Configuration


Phase of Flight TSO C129 Value on Label 116 Value on Label 326
Required CDI Scale
Enroute 5.0 nmi Raw CDI (2/3) 5
Terminal 1.0 nmi Raw CDI (1/7.5) 1
Approach 0.3 nmi Raw CDI (1/25) 0.3
Label 326 is not looked at by the Legacy Honeywell EFIS so the scaling of Label 116 is required
to meet the TSO C129 requirements.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-117


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-118


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-21 GNS-XLS GAMA 429 Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0016 Rev. -)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-119


J GNS-XLS

3.18 ARINC 571/575/706/IC-600 INPUT


3.18.1 INS/WEATHER RADAR INTERFACE
Input Type: Two input ports. Each port is two wire serial data per ARINC 571
from an INS or weather radar.
Data Rate: 11 +3.5 kB/s.
Receive Format: Standard ARINC 571 data word, 32 bits, Return-To-Zero (RZ) form
at with at least four nulls between words.
Bus Contents: See FIGURE 3-22 ARINC 571 Digital Input Chart.
J101-F5 INS/WX/EFIS 429 RECEIVE HI
J101-F6 INS/WX/EFIS 429 RECEIVE LO
J101-F1 DADC/EFIS 429/IC-600 RECEIVE HI (WX if INS installed on pins F5 & F6)
J101-F2 DADC/EFIS 429/IC-600 RECEIVE LO (WX if INS installed on pins F5 & F6)

FIGURE 3-22 ARINC 571 Digital Input Chart

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-121


J GNS-XLS

3.18.2 AIR DATA COMPUTER INTERFACE


These ports receive serial data from an ARINC 575/429 Air Data Computer.
J101-F1 DADC/WX/EFIS/IC-600 RECEIVE HI
J101-F2 DADC/WX/EFIS/IC-600 RECEIVE LO

A. ARINC 575 Data Format


Input Type: Two wire serial data that meets the electrical and
functional specifications of ARINC 575.
Data Rate: 11 +/ −3.5 KBS.
Altitude:
Range: -1,000 ft. to 50,000 ft.
Accuracy: +15 feet from -1,000 to sea level.
+20 feet at 10,000 feet.
+40 feet at 30,000 feet.
+80 feet at 50,000 feet.
Label: 204 (Octal).
Format: BNR.
Update Rate: 16 per second.
True Airspeed:
Range: 115 - 599 knots.
Accuracy: +4 knots.
Label: 210 (Octal).
Format: BNR.
Update Rate: 2 per second.
Pressure Altitude: Used only to produce label 223 on the ARINC 571
output bus.
Range: -1,000 ft. to 50,000 ft.
Accuracy: +15 feet from -1,000 to sea level.
+20 feet at 10,000 feet.
+40 feet at 30,000 feet.
+80 feet at 50,000 feet.
Label: 203 (Octal).
Format: BNR.
Update Rate: 16 per second.
Altitude Rate:
Range: +20,000 feet per minute.
Label: 212 (Octal).
Format: BNR.
Update Rate: 16 per second.
Static Air Temp.: Used by AFIS.
Range: -50 to +995C.
Label: 213 (Octal).
Format: BNR.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-122


J GNS-XLS

Update Rate: 2 per second.

B. ARINC 429 Data Format


Input Type: Two wire serial data bus that meets the electrical and
functional specifications of ARINC 429 (except as noted).
Data Rate: ARINC 429 low speed (12.0 - 14.5 KBS).
Altitude:
Range: -1,000 ft. to 60,000 feet (Sperry 7000777-922).
0 ft. to 51,000 feet (all IDC).
Accuracy: Sperry (7000777-922):
+15 feet from -1,000 feet to sea level.
+20 feet at 10,000 feet.
+40 feet at 30,000 feet.
+80 feet at 50,000 feet.
+100 feet at 60,000 feet.
IDC (40 910-101):
+100 feet at all altitudes.
IDC (37070-500):
+150 feet from 0 to 20,000 feet.
+350 feet from 20,000 to 51,000 feet.
Label: 204 (Octal).
Format: BNR.
Update Rate: 16 per second for Sperry.
Unspecified high rate for IDC.
True Airspeed:
Range: 70 - 599 knots (Sperry).
80 - 500 knots (IDC 37070-500).
80 - 599 knots (IDC 49010-001).
Label: abel 210 (Octal)
Accuracy: Sperry:
+8 knots at 70 knots.
+4 knots at 150 - 599 knots.
IDC:
+4 knots.
Pressure Altitude: Accepted if label 204 is not present.
Range: -1,000 ft. to 60,000 feet.
Label: 203 (Octal).
Format: BNR.
Update Rate: 16 per second.
Altitude Rate:
Range: +20,000 feet per minute.
Label: 212 (Octal).
Format: BNR.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-123


J GNS-XLS

Static Air Temp: Used by AFIS.


Range: -50 to +995C.
Label: 213 (Octal).
Format: BNR.
Update Rate: 2 per second.
Selected Altitude:
Range: -1,000 - 60,000 feet.
Label: 102
Format: BNR.
Update Rate: 5 per second.

3.18.3 CONCENTRATED ARINC 429 INPUT


The GNS-XLS is capable of receiving ARINC 429 information on a concentrated data bus. This
ARINC 429 concentrated data bus is used by the IC- 600 Display Guidance Computer, which is
part of the Honeywell SPZ-5000 Integrated Avionics System. Data is combined from the air data
computer, AHRS, EFIS, and autopilot. The following labels are received at a 12 to 14.5 KBS data
rate (low speed). All other information is defined by ARINC 429 or GAMA as noted. Additional
labels may be present on the bus, but are ignored by the GNS- XLS.

Air Data:
DESCRIPTION OCTAL LABEL INTERVAL NOTE
Selected Altitude 102 132 mS ARINC 429
Pressure Altitude 203 132 mS ARINC 429
Baro Altitude 204 132 mS ARINC 429
Mach 205 132 mS ARINC 429
Indicated Airspeed 206 132 mS ARINC 429
True Airspeed (TAS) 210 132 mS ARINC 429
Total Air Temperature 211 132 mS ARINC 429
Altitude Rate 212 132 mS ARINC 429
Static Air Temperature 213 132 mS ARINC 429

AHRS:
DESCRIPTION OCTAL LABEL INTERVAL NOTE
Magnetic Heading 320 132 mS ARINC 429
Pitch Attitude 324 132 mS ARINC 429
Roll Attitude 325 132 mS ARINC 429
Body Normal Accel 333 132 mS ARINC 429

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-124


J GNS-XLS

EFIS/CONTROL/AUTOPILOT:
DESCRIPTION OCTAL LABEL INTERVAL NOTE
Selected Course 100 132 mS ARINC 429
Selected Heading 101 132 mS ARINC 429
DGC Status 270 132 mS

Bits Assignments
0-7 Octal Label 270
8-9 SDI
10 Logic 1 = Onside NAV 1 Tune Disable
Logic 0 = Onside NAV 1 Tune Enable
11 Logic 1 = Onside NAV 2 Tune Disable
Logic 0 = Onside NAV 2 Tune Enable
12 Logic 1 = Cross Side NAV 1 Tune Disable
Logic 0 = Cross Side NAV 1 Tune Enable
13 Logic 1 = Cross Side NAV 2 Tune Disable
Logic 0 = Cross Side NAV 2 Tune Enable
14 Logic 1 = Weight on Gear
Logic 0 = No Weight on Gear
15-19 Reserved
20-28 Spare
29-30 Sign/Status Matrix
11 = Normal
01 = NCD
31 Parity

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-125


J GNS-XLS

DESCRIPTION OCTAL LABEL INTERVAL NOTE


External Waypoint Latitude 306 Burst GAMA
External Waypoint Longitude 307 Burst GAMA
Specific Equipment ID 371 132 mS

Bits Assignments
0-7 Octal Label 371
8-9 SDI
10-13 Hex Equipment ID Code (LSB) = 05
14-17 Hex Equipment ID Code (MSB) = 02
18-23 Binary Company ID Code = 12
24-28 Spare
29-30 Sign/Status Matrix
31 Parity

J101-F1 DADC/WX/EFIS/IC-600 RECEIVE HI


J101-F2 DADC/WX/EFIS/IC-600 RECEIVE LO

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-126


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-23 GNS-XLS ARINC 571/575/706/IC-600 Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0017 Rev. -)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-127


J GNS-XLS

3.19 ARINC 561 SERIAL OUTPUT


The GNS-XLS provides a single ARINC 561 serial digital output port to allow data transfer to an
HSI and the Collins and Sperry EFIS.
Output Type: Three 2-wire, single ended signals.
Logic State: Clock, data and sync per ARINC 561.
Logic 1 = 12.5 +2.5 volt referenced to ground.
Logic 0 = 0 +1 volt referenced to ground.
Data Rate: 12.5 kB/s.
Transmission Format: Clock is free running at data rate. Data is in 32-bit words, NRZ
(Non-Return-To-Zero) format. Words are separated by at least
a 1 bit gap. Word sync goes high during first 8 bits to form label
and for last 24 bits to form data envelopes.
Data Outputs: See TABLE 3-7 ARINC 561 Digital Output.
J101-C5 ARINC 561 CLOCK HI
J101-C6 ARINC 561 CLOCK LO
J101-C7 ARINC 561 DATA HI
J101-C8 ARINC 561 DATA LO
J101-C9 ARINC 561 SYNC HI
J101-C10 ARINC 561 SYNC LO

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-129


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-7 ARINC 561 Digital Output


(Sheet 1 of 2)

NAME LABEL FORMAT UPDATE RANGE RESOLUTION


RATE
Distance-To-Go 001 Octal BCD per ARINC 400 msec 0 to 3999.9 nm 0.1 nm
419
Time-To-Go 002 Octal BCD per ARINC 400 msec 0 to 399.9 0.1 min.
419 min.
Groundspeed 012 Octal BCD per ARINC 400 msec 0 to 2000 1 knot
419 knots
Desired Course 157 Octal BNR per 11309 10 seconds +180 degrees 0.1 degree
Between Way
points
NOTE: Computed for current leg and 9 legs beyond. All waypoints updated every 10 sec.
Relative Bearing 115 Octal BNR per 11309 100 msec +180 degrees 0.1 degree
To Waypoint
Distance Be tween 156 Octal BNR per 11309 10 second 0 to 512 nm 0.1 nm
Waypoints
NOTE: Computed for current leg and 9 legs beyond. All waypoints updated every 10 sec.
Windspeed 015 Octal BCD per ARINC 400 msec 0 to 399 knots 1.0 knot
419
Wind Direction 016 Octal BCD per ARINC 400 msec 0 to 359 de 1.0 degree
419 grees true
NOTE: Wind will be sent as no computed data if wind is NOT valid in GNS.
Wind-On-Nose 063 Octal BNR per 11309 10 seconds 0 to 3999 1.0 knot
knots
NOTE: Wind will be sent as no computed data if wind is NOT valid in GNS.
Crosstrack Dis 003 Octal BCD per ARINC 100 msec 0 to 399.9 nm Enroute 5nm
tance 419 0 to 30 nm Terminal 1nm
0 to 2 nm of Approach 0.3 nm
FAF
True Heading 014 Octal BCD per ARINC 100 msec 0 to 359 de 0.1 degree
419 grees
NOTE: True Heading will be output as no computed data for the following:
1) Heading system warn input indicates invalids.
2) Magnetic variation is invalid (position is not between 705 N and 605 S) or variation
has not been manually entered and mag heading is being input to system.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-130


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-7 ARINC 561 Digital Output


(Sheet 2 of 2)

NAME LABEL FORMAT UPDATE RANGE RESOLUTION


RATE
Magnetic 031 Octal BCD per ARINC 400 msec 0 to 180 de 0.1 degree
Variation 419 grees
NOTE: Magnetic variation will be sent as no computed data when position is not between
705 N and 605 S and no manual mag variation has been entered.
Status Word 110 Octal DISCRETE 400 msec
Bit 8 = 1 for WPT ALERT
Bit 9 = 1 for DR
Bit 13 = 1 for RNAV mode
Bit 22 = 1 for Steering Valid
Bit 23 = 1 for SXTK WARN Condition
Bit 26 = 1 for TRUE
Bit 26 = 0 for MAG
Bit 27 = 1 for Message
Bit 28 = 1 for HSI valid Condition (See Note)
Bit 28 = 0 for No WARN Condition
Bit 29 = 1 for TO flag
Bit 30 = 1 for FROM flag
Bit 29 = 0 for Invalid
Bit 30 = 0 for Invalid
NOTE: If Option 1, USED, is selected on the EFIS HSI WARN Page during system
configuration programming, the following conditions will set Bit 28 to Invalid (0):
1. No active leg is defined.
2. System is currently in DR mode.
3. Cross track deviation is greater than 128 nm.
4. A "VERIFY POSITION" message is displayed.
5. A "VAR WARNING - MAN VAR REQD" message is displayed.
If Option 2, DISABLED, is selected, the above conditions will not set Bit 28 to Invalid.
Crosstrack 155 Octal BNR per 11309 100 msec +150 A
Deviation
Bank Command 121 Octal BNR per 11309 100 msec +1805 0.1 degree
(Roll Steering) Bank Limit:
+305
Drift Angle 006 Octal BCD per ARINC 400 msec +1805 0.1 degree
419
Vertical 117 Octal BNR 100 msec +2 dots 0.0039 dots
Deviation

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-131


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-132


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-24 GNS-XLS ARINC 561 Serial Output Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0018 Rev. -)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-133


J GNS-XLS

3.20 ARINC 571 SERIAL OUTPUT


This output can be used for a weather radar and/or an INS.
Data Rate: 12.5 kB/s.
Transmit Format: Standard ARINC 571 data word, return to zero (RZ) format with at
least 4 nulls between words.
Data Output: See FIGURE 3-25 ARINC 571 Digital Output Chart.
J101-C11 ARINC 571 TRANSMIT HI
J101-C12 ARINC 571 TRANSMIT LO

FIGURE 3-25 ARINC 571 Digital Output Chart


(Sheet 1 of 3)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-135


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-25 ARINC 571 Digital Output


(Sheet 2 of 3)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-136


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-25 ARINC 571 Digital Output


(Sheet 3 of 3)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-137


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-138


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-26 GNS-XLS ARINC 571 Serial Output Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01708-0019 Rev. -)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-139


J GNS-XLS

3.21 EGPWS INTERFACE


The GNS-XLS (part number 17960-0203-XXXX) has the capability to display terrain data from an
Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS) through the KCPB bus. The GNS-XLS
also provides GPS data to the EGPWS through the RADIO 429 TRANSMIT 1/ EGPWS bus. The
GNS-XLS GAMA 429 bus can also be used to provide data to the EGPWS. See Section 3.17
GAMA ARINC 429 INTERFACE for GAMA 429 bus definition. See FIGURE 3-27 Single GNS--
XLS to EGPWS Interconnect and FIGURE 3-28 Dual GNS-XLS to EGPWS Interconnect for GNS-
XLS to EGPWS interconnections.
EGPWS Data Inputs to GNS-XLS:
J101 Q4 KCPB RX (H)
J101 Q5 KCPB RX (L)
J101 Q6 KCPB TERMINATION
Terrain display data is provided by the EGPWS to the GNS-XLS by the KCPB bus. The KCPB bus
is input to the GNS-XLS on J101 pin Q4, pin Q5, and pin Q6. Pin Q4 is the HI side of the bus, and
pin Q5 or pin Q6 is the LO side of the bus. Pin Q6 has an impedance termination, and should be
used for the low side connection with a single FMS displayed on the bus. When more than one
FMS or display is connected to the same KCPB bus output, the display with the most distance
from the EGPWS should be connected to pin Q6. The other FMS units connect to pin Q5.
KCPB bus labels are listed below.
TABLE 3-8 KCPB Bus Labels
OCTAL LABEL DESCRIPTION UPDATE INTERVAL
020 Pixel Data 5 ms
024 Text Data 1 sec (nominal)
027 Query/ Setup As Required

GNS-XLS Data Outputs to EGPWS:


J101 N5 RADIO 429 TRANSMIT 1 (H)/ EGPWS
J101 N6 RADIO 429 TRANSMIT 1 (L)/ EGPWS
J101 I7 GAMA 429 TRANSMIT (H)
J101 I8 GAMA 429 TRANSMIT (L)
The GNS-XLS provides GPS navigation data and keyboard control for the FMS terrain display on
the 429 TRANSMIT 1/ EGPWS bus on pins N5 and N6 of the GNS-XLS. The data bus is low speed
ARINC 429; Formatted in accordance with ARINC 743A. The 429 TRANSMIT 1/ EGPWS bus
labels are listed below.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-141


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-9 429 TRANSMIT 1/ EGPWS Low Speed ARINC 429 Bus Labels
OCTAL LABEL FUNCTION DESCRIPTION TRANSMIT INTERVAL
011 CDU CDU Display Type On Demand
012(SAL) CDU CDU Key Press 100 ms
076 GPS Altitude - GPS (MSL) 1 sec
103 GPS Track Angle - GPS 1 sec
110 GPS Latitude Normal - GPS 1 sec
111 GPS Longitude Normal - GPS 1 sec
112 GPS Ground Speed - GPS 1 sec
130 GPS GPS Horizontal Integrity Limit 1 sec
136 GPS Vertical Figure of Merit - GPS 1 sec
143 FMS Destination Longitude 1 sec
144 FMS Destination Latitude 1 sec
165 GPS Vertical Velocity - GPS 1 sec
166 GPS North/South Velocity - GPS 1 sec
174 GPS East/West Velocity - GPS 1 sec
247 GPS Horizontal Figure of Merit - GPS 1 sec
266 GPS FMS Discrete Word - Type 2 1 sec
273 GPS Sensor Status - GPS 1 sec
310 FMS FMS Latitude 1 sec
311 FMS FMS Longitude 1 sec
312 FMS FMS Ground Speed 1 sec
313 FMS FMS Track Angle 1 sec
314 FMS True Heading 1 sec
320 FMS Magnetic Heading 1 sec
120 GPS Latitude Fine - GPS 1 sec
121 GPS Longitude Fine - GPS 1 sec

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-142


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-27 Single GNS--XLS to EGPWS Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01745-0000 Rev. A)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-143


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-28 Dual GNS-XLS to EGPWS Interconnect


(Dwg. No. 155-01746-0000 Rev. A)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-145


J GNS-XLS

3.22 SEARCH AND RESCUE CAPABILITIES


The GNS-XLS (part number 17960-0203-XXXX) may be configured to enable the following search
and rescue features:
• Orbit, Ladder, Sector, Parallel Line, and Expanding Square Search patterns in flight planning.
• Target waypoints from external weather radar or infrared radar systems.
• Mark-On-Target waypoints.
• Tokyo Datum latitude/longitude conversion.
3.22.1 MARK-ON-TARGET DISCRETE INPUT
The GNS-XLS (part number 17960-0203-XXXX) may be configured for search and rescue target
waypoints. When configured for target waypoints, a Mark-On-Target discrete input is available.
When the discrete is active, the aircraft position is entered as a target waypoint.
The Mark-On-Target is ACTIVE +28 Vdc. Momentary activation of the Mark-On-Target Discrete
input generates a target waypoint. The ACTIVE +28 Vdc input is connected to pin N12 as shown
below. When not configured for target waypoints, pin N12 is a spare input marked as:
spare_in_flag_1.

FIGURE 3-29 Mark-On-Target Discrete Input

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-147


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-148


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 3-30 GNS-XLS CDU Connector (J101)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-149


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-10 GNS-XLS CDU Connector (J101) Pin Function List


(Sheet 1 of 7)

PIN I/O DESCRIPTION


A1 I ADF RECEIVE HI
A2 I ADF RECEIVE LO
A3 O AFIS ON CONTROL
A4 I AFIS RECEIVE HI
A5 I AFIS RECEIVE LO
A6 O AFIS TRANSMIT HI
A7 O AFIS TRANSMIT LO
A8 I ALT PRESELECT ERROR RX HI
A9 I ALT PRESELECT ERROR RX LO
A10 I ALT PRESELECT ERROR VALID
A11 I ALT RATE REF RX HI
A12 I ALT RATE REF RX LO
A13 O FOR FACTORY USE ONLY
B1 I ALTITUDE A1
B2 I ALTITUDE A2
B3 I ALTITUDE A3
B4 I ALTITUDE A4
B5 I ALTITUDE A5
B6 I ALTITUDE A6
B7 I ALTITUDE A7
B8 I ALTITUDE A8
B9 I ALTITUDE A9
B10 I ALTITUDE A10
B11 I ALT RATE SIGNAL RX HI
B12 I ALT RATE SIGNAL RX LO
B13 I ANNUNCIATOR TEST
C1 I ALTITUDE AC REF HI
C2 I ALTITUDE AC REF LO
C3 I ALTITUDE VALID
C4 APPR MODE ANNUNCIATE
C5 O ARINC 561 CLOCK HI
C6 O ARINC 561 CLOCK LO
C7 O ARINC 561 DATA HI
C8 O ARINC 561 DATA LO
C9 O ARINC 561 SYNC HI

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-150


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-10 GNS-XLS CDU Connector (J101) Pin Function List


(Sheet 2 of 7)

PIN I/O DESCRIPTION


C10 O ARINC 561 SYNC LO
C11 O ARINC 571 TRANSMIT HI
C12 O ARINC 571 TRANSMIT LO
C13 O FOR FACTORY USE ONLY
D1 RESERVED
D2 RESERVED
D3 RESERVED
D4 RESERVED
D5 I ATC RECEIVE HI
D6 I ATC RECEIVE LO
D7 I AUTOPILOT AC REF HI
D8 I AUTOPILOT AC REF LO
D9 AUTOTUNE STRAP 1 IN
D10 AUTOTUNE STRAP 2 IN
D11 O CROSS TRACK DEVIATION C
D12 O CROSS TRACK DEVIATION H
D13 O DISTANCE VALID
E1 I COMM 1 RECEIVE HI
E2 I COMM 1 RECEIVE LO
E3 I COMM 2 RECEIVE HI
E4 I COMM 2 RECEIVE LO
E5 SPARE 1
E6 O CONFIG MODULE +5 VDC
E7 O CONFIG MODULE CLOCK
E8 I CONFIG MODULE DATA IN
E9 0 CONFIG MODULE DATA OUT
E10 CONFIG MODULE GROUND
E11 O CONFIG MODULE SELECT
E12 O DR ANNUNCIATE
E13 O MESSAGE ANNUNCIATE
F1 I DADC/WX/EFIS 429/IC-600 RECEIVE HI
F2 I DADC/WX/EFIS 429/IC-600 RECEIVE LO
F3 I EFIS RS-422 RECEIVE HI
F4 I EFIS RS-422 RECEIVE LO
F5 I INS/WX/EFIS 429 RX HI

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-151


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-10 GNS-XLS CDU Connector (J101) Pin Function List


(Sheet 3 of 7)

PIN I/O DESCRIPTION


F6 I INS/WX/EFIS 429 RX LO
F7 I RPU RS 422 RX HI
F8 I RPU RS 422 RX LO
F9 I RPU RS 422 TX HI
F10 I RPU RS 422 TX LO
F11 O SELECT CROSS TRACK WARN
F12 I 28 VOLT LIGHT BUS
F13 I 5 VOLT LIGHT BUS
G1 I DME 1 RANGE C
G2 I DME 1 RANGE H
G3 I DME 1 RECEIVE HI
G4 I DME 1 RECEIVE LO
G5 I DME 1 VALID
G6 I DME 2 RANGE C
G7 I DME 2 RANGE H
G8 I DME 2 RECEIVE HI
G9 I DME 2 RECEIVE LO
G10 I DME 2 VALID
G11 NO CONNECTION
G12 NO CONNECTION
G13 I LIGHT BUS RETURN
H1 I FUEL FLOW A1 HI
H2 I FUEL FLOW A1 LO
H3 I FUEL FLOW A2 HI
H4 I FUEL FLOW A2 LO
H5 I FUEL FLOW A3 HI
H6 I FUEL FLOW A3 LO
H7 I FUEL FLOW A4 HI
H8 I FUEL FLOW A4 LO
H9 I FUEL FLOW D1 HI
H10 I FUEL FLOW D1 LO
H11 I FUEL FLOW D2 HI
H12 I FUEL FLOW D2 LO
H13 O WAYPOINT ANNUNCIATOR
I1 I FUEL FLOW D3/R1 HI

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-152


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-10 GNS-XLS CDU Connector (J101) Pin Function List


(Sheet 4 of 7)

PIN I/O DESCRIPTION


I2 I FUEL FLOW D3/R1 LO
I3 I FUEL FLOW D4/R2 HI
I4 I FUEL FLOW D4/R2 LO
I5 O TO/FROM FLAG
I6 O TO/FROM FLAG GRND
I7 O GAMA 429 TRANSMIT HI
I8 O GAMA 429 TRANSMIT LO
I9 I INTRA SYSTEM RECEIVE HI
I10 I INTRA SYSTEM RECEIVE LO
I11 O INTRA SYSTEM TRANSMIT HI
I12 O INTRA SYSTEM TRANSMIT LO
I13 I STRUT SWITCH IN
J1 I MAGNETIC HEADING VALID
J2 I MAGNETIC HEADING AC REF HI
J3 I MAGNETIC HEADING AC REF LO
J4 I MAGNETIC HEADING X
J5 I MAGNETIC HEADING Y
J6 I MAGNETIC HEADING Z
J7 O NAV 1 AUTOTUNE ANNUNCIATE
J8 I NAV 1 AUTOTUNE SW
J9 O NAV 2 AUTOTUNE ANNUNCIATE
J10 I NAV 2 AUTOTUNE SW
J11 I TRUE/MAG IN (True=28VDC, Mag=Open)
J12 RESERVED
J13 RESERVED
K1 I POS UNIT 1 RECEIVE HI
K2 I POS UNIT 1 RECEIVE LO
K3 O POS UNIT 1 TRANSMIT HI
K4 O POS UNIT 1 TRANSMIT LO
K5 I POS UNIT 2 RECEIVE HI
K6 I POS UNIT 2 RECEIVE LO
K7 O POS UNIT 2 TRANSMIT HI
K8 O POS UNIT 2 TRANSMIT LO
K9 I POS UNIT 3/AHRS RECEIVE HI
K10 I POS UNIT 3/AHRS RECEIVE LO

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-153


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-10 GNS-XLS CDU Connector (J101) Pin Function List


(Sheet 5 of 7)

PIN I/O DESCRIPTION


K11 O RADIO 429 TX 2/POS UNIT 3 TX HI (LS)
K12 O RADIO 429 TX 2/POS UNIT 3 TX LO (LS)
K13 O RADIO TUNE VALID
L1 I HSI BEARING AC REF HI
L2 I HSI BEARING AC REF LO
L3 O HSI BEARING B1
L4 O HSI BEARING B2
L5 O HSI BEARING B3
L6 O HSI BEARING B4
L7 O HSI BEARING B5
L8 O HSI BEARING B6
L9 I HSI COURSE AC REF HI
L10 I HSI COURSE AC REF LO
L11 O HSI COURSE C1
L12 O HSI COURSE C2
L13 O HSI COURSE C3
M1 I TUNE DISABLE 1
M2 I TUNE DISABLE 2
M3 I TUNE DISABLE 3
M4 I TUNE DISABLE 4
M5 O VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID
M6 O VERTICAL DEVIATION HI
M7 O VERTICAL DEVIATION LO
M8 I SYSTEM VALID IN (Dual FMS Only)
M9 O SYSTEM VALID OUT (Dual FMS Only)
M10 O HSI VALID/NAV WARN
M11 O HSI COURSE C4
M12 O HSI COURSE C5
M13 O HSI COURSE C6
N1 O RADIO 422 TRANSMIT 1 HI
N2 O RADIO 422 TRANSMIT 1 LO
N3 O RADIO 422 TRANSMIT 2 HI
N4 O RADIO 422 TRANSMIT 2 LO
N5 O RADIO 429 TRANSMIT 1 HI/ EGPWS
N6 O RADIO 429 TRANSMIT 1 LO/ EGPWS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-154


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-10 GNS-XLS CDU Connector (J101) Pin Function List


(Sheet 6 of 7)

PIN I/O DESCRIPTION


N7 O ROLL STEERING HI
N8 O ROLL STEERING LO
N9 O ROLL STEERING VALID
N10 O RPU ON CONTROL OUT
N11 I TAS VALID
N12 I SPARE IN FLAG 1/ MOT DISCRETE IN
N13 I EXTERNAL WPT DISABLE (Disable=Gnd)
O1 I TAS AC REF HI
O2 I TAS AC REF LO
O3 I TAS D1
O4 I TAS D2
O5 I TAS D3
O6 I TAS D4
O7 I TAS D5
O8 I VOR 1 AC REF HI
O9 I VOR 1 AC REF LO
O10 I VOR 1 BEARING COSINE HI
O11 I VOR 1 BEARING COSINE LO
O12 I VOR 1 BEARING SINE HI
O13 I VOR 1 BEARING SINE LO
P1 I VOR 1 RECEIVE HI
P2 I VOR 1 RECEIVE LO
P3 I VOR 2 AC REF HI
P4 I VOR 2 AC REF LO
P5 I VOR 2 BEARING COSINE HI
P6 I VOR 2 BEARING COSINE LO
P7 I VOR 2 BEARING SINE HI
P8 I VOR 2 BEARING SINE LO
P9 I VOR 2 RECEIVE HI
P10 I VOR 2 RECEIVE LO
P11 I VOR/LOC 1 SUPERFLAG
P12 I VOR/LOC 2 SUPERFLAG
P13 O HEADING MODE ANNUNCIATE
Q1 NO CONNECTION
Q2 I SPARE 429 RECEIVE HI

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-155


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-10 GNS-XLS CDU Connector (J101) Pin Function List


(Sheet 7 of 7)

PIN I/O DESCRIPTION


Q3 I SPARE 429 RECEIVE LO
Q4 I KCPB RX HI
Q5 I KCPB RX LO
Q6 I KCPB TERMINATION
Q7 SPARE
Q8 I RMT 1 PHOTO +
Q9 I RMT 1 PHOTO -
Q10 I RMT 2 PHOTO +
Q11 I RMT 2 PHOTO -
Q12 I GPS DIFF DATA IN
Q13 O GPS DIFF DATA OUT
R1 I RED +
R2 I RED -
R3 I GREEN +
R4 I GREEN -
R5 I BLUE +
R6 I BLUE -
R7 I RPU H SYNC
R8 I RPU SYNC GND
R9 I RPU V SYNC
R10 SPARE
R11 I DTU POWER RETURN
R12 O DTU POWER
R13 I 28 VDC AIRCRAFT BATTERY +
X1 NO CONNECTION
X2 I 28 VDC POWER IN
X3 O 28 VDC SWITCHED (RESERVED)
X4 I DC RETURN
X5 NO CONNECTION

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-156


J GNS-XLS

TABLE 3-11 Configuration Module Pin Function List


PIN I/O DESCRIPTION
1 I CONFIGURATION MOD DATA OUT
2 O CONFIGURATION MOD DATA IN
3 O CONFIGURATION MOD SEL
4 I CONFIGURATION MOD CLK
5 I CONFIGURATION MOD (GND)
6 I CONFIGURATION MOD (+5 VDC)

FIGURE 3-31 Configuration Module Pinout


(Bottom View)

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-157


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 3-158


J GNS-XLS

SECTION IV
POST INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION AND CHECK OUT

4.0 INTRODUCTION
This section describes the procedure for configuring the FMS to the specific aircraft installation.
To configure CDU P/N 17960-0101-XXXX or CDU P/N 17960-0102-XXXX refer to Section 4.1 IN-
STALLATION TEST PAGE (-0101, -0102) and Section 4.2 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE (-
0101, -0102). To configure CDU P/N 17960-0203-XXXX refer to Section 4.3 INSTALLATION
TEST PAGE (-0203) and Section 4.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE (-0203).

4.1 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE (-0101, -0102)


(Applicable to CDU P/N 17960-0101-XXXX and CDU P/N 17960-0102-XXXX Only)
A. Turn system on.
B. FIGURE 4-1 SELF TEST PAGE is displayed as the system performs a self test.
When the test is successful, the INITIALIZATION page will appear.

FIGURE 4-1 SELF TEST PAGE

C. On FIGURE 4-2 INITIALIZATION PAGE, insert 357777 in the DATE field and press
ENTER.

FIGURE 4-2 INITIALIZATION PAGE

D. FIGURE 4-3 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE is now displayed.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-1


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-3 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE

4.2 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE (-0101, -0102)


(Applicable to CDU P/N 17960-0101-XXXX and CDU P/N 17960-0102-XXXX Only)
A. Select Option 1, CONFIG. CHECK. See FIGURE 4-4 INSTALLATION TEST
PAGE.

FIGURE 4-4 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE

B. Press the ENTER Key.


C. FIGURE 4-5 READ/CHANGE CONFIGURATION OF: PAGE will appear.
The dates of previously entered configurations are shown in Options 1 through 3.
Option 4 allows a new configuration to be entered. The newest previously entered
configuration is shown in Option 1.
D. Select the appropriate option and press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-2


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-5 READ/CHANGE CONFIGURATION OF: PAGE

E. FIGURE 4-6 CONFIGURATION DISPLAY FORMAT PAGE appears. To create a


new configuration or modify a previously programmed configuration in the clear
text (UNPACKED) version: select 1, press ENTER and proceed to Step 4.2. G The
AFIS INSTALLED?.

FIGURE 4-6 CONFIGURATION DISPLAY FORMAT PAGE

NOTE:
PACKED: This option displays the hexadecimal
equivalents of the previously selected configuration
options. See FIGURE 4-7 CONFIGURATION
CODE PAGE.

UNPACKED: This option presents the clear text pro-


gram for configuration selection.

CAUTION:
THE "PACKED" REPRESENTATION OF THE
CONFIGURATION DATA DOES NOT DIS-
PLAY ALL CONFIGURATION OPTIONS SE-
LECTED. TO REVIEW AND SELECT ALL
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS, USE THE "UN-
PACKED" DISPLAY OPTION.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-3


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-7 CONFIGURATION CODE PAGE

F. Select option 1 and press ENTER. See FIGURE 4-6 CONFIGURATION DISPLAY
FORMAT PAGE.
G The AFIS INSTALLED?
. FIGURE 4-8 AFIS INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select whether the Air-
borne Flight Information System (AFIS) is installed. Press ENTER to continue to
the next step.

FIGURE 4-8 AFIS INSTALLED? PAGE

H. FIGURE 4-9 CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED PAGE is now displayed.


Select the option desired. Press ENTER to continue to the next step. If option 1
is selected, proceed to Section 4.2.1 NO CONCENTRATED DATA BUS IN-
STALLED. If option 2 is selected, proceed to Section 4.2.2 CONCENTRATED
DATA BUS INSTALLED (CDB WOG). If option 3 is selected, proceed to Section
4.2.3 CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED (DISCRETE WOG).

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-4


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-9 CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED PAGE

4.2.1 NO CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED


A. FIGURE 4-10 THIS FMS IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the option desired.
Press ENTER to continue to the next step.

FIGURE 4-10 THIS FMS IS: PAGE

B. The POSITION UNIT #1 IS: Page


FIGURE 4-11 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the option
desired. Press ENTER to continue to the next step. If option 1 is selected, indicat-
ing position unit #1 is not used, the page for position unit #2 will appear. Proceed
to Step 4.2.1. C. The POSITION UNIT #2 IS: Page.

FIGURE 4-11 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-5


J GNS-XLS

NOTE:
Not all options shown will be available for a particular
aircraft configuration.

1. If Option 2 (RPU) is selected, FIGURE 4-12 POSITION UNIT #1


RPU ANTENNA TYPE PAGE will appear. Select the proper anten-
na type. Press ENTER to continue to the next step.

FIGURE 4-12 POSITION UNIT #1 RPU ANTENNA TYPE PAGE

(a) FIGURE 4-13 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE


(OPTION 2) is now displayed. Select the proper port option. Press
ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-13 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE (OPTION 2)

2. If Option 3 (ARINC 704 IRS) is selected, FIGURE 4-14 POSITION


UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE (OPTION 3) will appear. Se-
lect the proper port option. Press ENTER to continue to the next
step.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-6


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-14 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE (OPTION 3)

(a) FIGURE 4-15 POSITION UNIT #1 IS PAGE will appear. Select the
proper option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-15 POSITION UNIT #1 IS PAGE

3. If Option 4 (ARINC 571 INS) is selected, press ENTER to continue


to the next step.
C. The POSITION UNIT #2 IS: Page
FIGURE 4-16 POSITION UNIT #2 IS PAGE is now displayed. Repeat Step 4.2.1.
B. The POSITION UNIT #1 IS: Page for each applicable option and any further Po-
sition Unit pages that may appear. Proceed to the next step.

FIGURE 4-16 POSITION UNIT #2 IS PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-7


J GNS-XLS

D. FIGURE 4-17 COMPASS HEADING PAGE is now displayed. Select the proper
option (if an IRS was previously selected, select NOT USED). Press ENTER to go
to the next step

FIGURE 4-17 COMPASS HEADING PAGE

E. FIGURE 4-18 TAS INTERFACE PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-18 TAS INTERFACE PAGE

NOTE:
If Option 5 (DIGITAL) is selected and the ENTER
key is pressed, an additional page will appear after
the ALT. RATE INTRF. page. See FIGURE 4-21
DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE. ARINC 429 or 575 may
be selected at this point.

F. FIGURE 4-19 ALT. INTERFACE PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-8


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-19 ALT. INTERFACE PAGE

NOTE:
If Option 4 (DIGITAL) is selected and the ENTER
Key is pressed an additional page will appear after
the ALT. RATE INTRF. page. See FIGURE 4-21
DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE. ARINC 429 or 575 may
be selected at this point.

G. FIGURE 4-20 ALT. RATE INTRF PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-20 ALT. RATE INTRF PAGE

NOTE:
If Option 3 (DIGITAL) is selected and the ENTER
Key is pressed an additional page will appear after
the ALT. RATE INTRF. page. See FIGURE 4-21
DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE. ARINC 429 or 575 may
be selected at this point.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-9


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-21 DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE

H. FIGURE 4-22 WEIGHT ON GEAR PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-22 WEIGHT ON GEAR PAGE

NOTE:
ACTIVE HI is chosen if the strut switch is open while
the aircraft is on the ground. ACTIVE LOW is cho-
sen if the strut switch is grounded while the aircraft is
on the ground.

I. FIGURE 4-23 ALT. PRESELECTOR INTERFACE TYPE PAGE is now displayed.


Select the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-10


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-23 ALT. PRESELECTOR INTERFACE TYPE PAGE

1. If Option 4 (ANALOG) is selected, FIGURE 4-24 ALT. PRESELEC-


TOR SCALING PAGE will appear. Select the desired scaling op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-24 ALT. PRESELECTOR SCALING PAGE

J. FIGURE 4-25 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE is now displayed. Select
the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-25 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-11


J GNS-XLS

K. FIGURE 4-26 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE is now displayed.
Select the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-26 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE

L. FIGURE 4-27 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE is now displayed. Se-


lect the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-27 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE

M. FIGURE 4-28 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-28 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-12


J GNS-XLS

N. FIGURE 4-29 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-29 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE

O. FIGURE 4-30 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-30 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE

P. FIGURE 4-31 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired option.
Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-31 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-13


J GNS-XLS

Q. FIGURE 4-32A EFIS DME ARC STYLE PAGE is now displayed. Three options ap-
pear as follows:

FIGURE 4-32A EFIS DME ARC STYLE PAGE

1. ARC AS GAP - When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the waypoints
along the arc have the GAP bit set and no waypoints or line seg-
ments are displayed along the arc.
2. ARC TO ON ARC - When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the way-
points along the arc are displayed along the arc and the TO way-
point moves along with each waypoint.
3. ARC TO AT END - When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the way-
points along the arc are displayed along the arc and the TO way-
point is the waypoint at the end of the arc.
R. FIGURE 4-32B DME ARC STYLE PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-32B DME ARC STYLE PAGE

1. SEGMENTED ARC - The aircraft will fly discrete arc segments, re-
turning to wings level once established on the segment.
2. CURVED ARC PATH - The aircraft will hold a constant bank angle
around the arc.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-14


J GNS-XLS

S. FIGURE 4-33 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE is now displayed.
Select the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-33 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE

T. FIGURE 4-34 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select
the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-34 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE

U. FIGURE 4-35 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-35 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-15


J GNS-XLS

V. FIGURE 4-36 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS PAGE is now displayed. Select the
desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-36 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS PAGE

W. FIGURE 4-37 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE is now displayed. Select the de-
sired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-37 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE

X. FIGURE 4-38 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS PAGE is now displayed. Select


the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-38 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-16


J GNS-XLS

Y. FIGURE 4-39 SIMULATOR MODE PAGE is now displayed. Select the Op-
tion 1 when configuring the aircraft. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-39 SIMULATOR MODE PAGE

CAUTION:
PLACING THE SYSTEM IN SIMULATOR
MODE IS NOT RECOMMENDED UNLESS
THE SYSTEM IS USED FOR DISPLAY PUR-
POSES ONLY. IF THE AIRCRAFT IS BEING
CHECKED OUT OR CONFIGURED FOR
FLIGHT, SELECT OPTION 1 (NOT SIMULA-
TOR) AND PRESS ENTER.
Z. FIGURE 4-40 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE is now displayed.
If configuration has been previously defined, it will be displayed on this page. If this
configuration is correct, press ENTER and proceed to Step 4.2.1. AA. The RADIO
TUNING CONFIGURATION Page. When entering a new configuration press the D
Key to obtain the FUEL FLOW INTERFACE page.

FIGURE 4-40 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE

1. The FUEL FLOW INTERFACE pages are now displayed. See FIG-
URE 4-41A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1 and FIGURE 4-41B
FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-17


J GNS-XLS

Using the D (Down) or the U (Up) Keys to scroll through the options.
When the desired option is in the cursor field, press ENTER to ob-
tain the appropriate set of scaling pages.

FIGURE 4-41A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-41B FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2

(a) If Option 1 (NO SENSORS) is selected system will go to Step 4.2.1.


AA. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION Page.
(b) If Option 2 (FREQUENCY) is selected the FREQUENCY SCALING
(PPH/HZ) pages appear. See FIGURE 4-42A FREQUENCY
SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-42C FREQUEN-
CY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3. Select appropriate manufacturer
and scaling by using the D or U Keys to place the option in the cur-
sor field and then press ENTER.
NOTE:
LEAR stands for J.E.T. fuel flow manufacturer and
AERO is AERO Systems.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-18


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-42A FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-42B FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-42C FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3

(c) If Option 3 (PULSE WIDTH) is selected the PULSE WIDTH SCAL-


ING (PPH/MS) pages will appear. See FIGURE 4-43A PULSE
WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-43C
PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3. Use the D or U Keys
to place the appropriate manufacturer/scaling in the cursor field and
then press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-19


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-43A PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-43B PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-43C PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3

(d) If Option 4 (DC AMPLITUDE) is selected the DC AMPLITUDE


SCALING (PPH/V) pages are displayed. See FIGURE 4-44A DC
AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-44I
DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT. Use the D or U Keys to place the
appropriate manufacturer/scaling in the cursor field and then press
ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-20


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-44A DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-44B DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-44C DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 3

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-21


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-44D DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 4

FIGURE 4-44E DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 5

FIGURE 4-44F DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 6

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-22


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-44G DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 7

FIGURE 4-44H DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8

(1) If the USER ENTERED option is selected (FIGURE 4-44H


DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8) the page
shown in FIGURE 4-44I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT
will be displayed.

FIGURE 4-44I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT

(2) Type in any whole number value of fuel flow scaling.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-23


J GNS-XLS

(e) If Option 5 (AC AMPLITUDE) is selected, FIGURE 4-45 AC AMPLI-


TUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE will appear. Use the D or U Keys
to place the desired option in the cursor field and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-45 AC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE

(f) If Option 6 (DC COMP. FREQ) is selected, FIGURE 4-46 DC


COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE appears. Use the D
or U Keys to place the desired option in the cursor field and press
ENTER.

FIGURE 4-46 DC COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE

(g) FIGURE 4-47 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE is now displayed. Select


the number that corresponds to number of engines on the aircraft
and press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-24


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-47 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE

NOTE:
The number of engines vary per selected fuel flow in-
terface.

AA. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION Page


FIGURE 4-48 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE is now displayed. If the
radio tuning configuration has been previously defined it will be present on this
page. If this configuration is acceptable, press ENTER and go to Step 4.2.1. BB.
The NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page. If changing or entering a new configuration, press
the D Key to obtain the options list.

FIGURE 4-48 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE

1. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION pages listing the available


options are now displayed. See FIGURE 4-49A RADIO TUNING
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-49E RA-
DIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 5. Using the D
(Down) or the U (Up) Keys to scroll through the options. When the
desired option is in the cursor field and press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-25


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-49A RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-49B RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-49C RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 3

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-26


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-49D RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 4

FIGURE 4-49E RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 5

(a) If Option 1, 8, 9, 11, or 12 is selected, the system will go to Step


4.2.1. BB. The NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page.
(b) If Option 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, or 13 is selected, FIGURE 4-50 AUTO-
TUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE PAGE will be displayed. Select the
desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-50 AUTOTUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-27


J GNS-XLS

(1) Select appropriate electrical input to control AUTOTUNE


DISABLE and press ENTER. See FIGURE 4-51 AUTO-
TUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF: PAGE or FIGURE 4-
52 AUTOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF: PAGE.

FIGURE 4-51 AUTOTUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF: PAGE

FIGURE 4-52 AUTOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF: PAGE

(c) If Option 7 is selected, FIGURE 4-53 VOR BEARING PAGE will be


displayed. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-53 VOR BEARING PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-28


J GNS-XLS

BB. The NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page


FIGURE 4-54 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-54 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

CC. FIGURE 4-55A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER. If Options 7, 8, or 9 were selected on the RADIO TUN-
ING CONFIGURATION page, go to Step 4.2.1. KK. The ADF 2 INSTALLED? Page
from this point. If Option 11 or 12 was selected, proceed to next step. If any other
option was selected, proceed to Step 4.2.1. DD. The COMM 1 INSTALLED? Page.

FIGURE 4-55A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

1. If Option 2 or 3 is selected on the NAV 2 INSTALLED? page, FIG-


URE 4-55B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS PAGE will be displayed. Se-
lect the appropriate option.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-29


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-55B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS PAGE

DD. The COMM 1 INSTALLED? Page


FIGURE 4-56 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-56 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

EE. FIGURE 4-57 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-57 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-30


J GNS-XLS

FF. FIGURE 4-58 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE is now displayed. Select
the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-58 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE

GG. FIGURE 4-59 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-59 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE

HH. FIGURE 4-60 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-60 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-31


J GNS-XLS

II. FIGURE 4-61 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-61 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

JJ. FIGURE 4-62 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the de-
sired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-62 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

KK. The ADF 2 INSTALLED? Page


FIGURE 4-63 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-63 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-32


J GNS-XLS

LL. FIGURE 4-64 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT PAGE is now displayed.
Refer to Airman's Information Manual (AIM) for specific aircraft type and applicable
parameter. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-64 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT PAGE

NOTE:
The default selection of 230 is for Civil Turbojet.

MM. FIGURE 4-65 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT PAGE is now displayed. Re-
fer to Airman's Information Manual (AIM) for specific aircraft type and applicable
parameter. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-65 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT PAGE

NN. FIGURE 4-66A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE is now displayed. The FMS uses a
default bank angle limit of 30 degrees for roll steering. this bank are reduced incre-
mentally at a rate of 1 degree per 1,000 feet.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-33


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-66A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE

1. If Option 1 (DEFAULT) is selected, there will be no roll limiting


through the FMS when the ENTER key is depressed. Proceed to
Step 4.2.1. OO. The ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR Page.
2. Select Option 2 (VARIABLE) to change the bank angle limits. When
ENTER is pressed, the FIGURE 4-66B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIM-
ITING PAGE will appear with the cursor over the Flight Level (FL)
field showing a default value of 14.

FIGURE 4-66B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMITING PAGE

3. Enter any whole number value from 14 to 22. This is the altitude at
which the bank angle will begin. Press ENTER and the cursor will
move to the High Altitude Roll Limit field as shown in FIGURE 4-66C
HIGH ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-34


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-66C HIGH ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE

4. Enter any whole number value from 15 to 25. After the value is en-
tered, the system will automatically calculate the altitude at which
the bank angle reduction will be complete. The system will reduce
the maximum bank angle in increments from 30 degrees at the Be-
gin Limiting Altitude at a rate of one degree per 1,000 feet until the
High Altitude Roll Limit is reached.

OO. The ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR Page


FIGURE 4-67 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE is now displayed. If Option
1 (DEFAULT) is selected, the recommended default gains used to compute the roll
steering commands will be used. Select Option 2 to increase the default gains by
a factor of 1.5. Select Option 3 to increase the default gains by a factor of 2.0.
NOTE:
In some installations an increase in the roll steering
gains may improve the lateral tracking performance
of the system. The default roll steering gains repre-
sent a compromise in ride comfort and tracking per-
formance.

FIGURE 4-67 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-35


J GNS-XLS

CAUTION:
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE DEFAULT
ROLL STEERING GAINS BE USED UNLESS
FLIGHT TEST DATA INDICATES THAT THE
LATERAL TRACKING PERFORMANCE MAY
BE IMPROVED BY INCREASED ROLL
STEERING GAINS. INCREASING THE GAINS
IN SOME INSTALLATIONS MAY DEGRADE
THE TRACKING PERFORMANCE OF THE
SYSTEM.
PP. FIGURE 4-68 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect YES or NO then press ENTER. System Configuration is now complete.

FIGURE 4-68 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE

4.2.2 CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED (CDB WOG)


A. FIGURE 4-69 THIS FMS IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the option desired.
Press ENTER to continue to the next step.

FIGURE 4-69 THIS FMS IS: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-36


J GNS-XLS

B. The POSITION UNIT #1 IS Page


FIGURE 4-70 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the option
desired. Press ENTER to continue to the next step. If option 1 is selected the page
for position unit #2 will appear, indicating position unit #1 is not used. Proceed to
Step 4.2.2. C. The POSITION UNIT #2 IS: Page.

FIGURE 4-70 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE

1. If Option 2 (RPU) is selected, the FIGURE 4-71 POSITION UNIT #1


RPU ANTENNA TYPE PAGE will appear. Select the proper anten-
na type. Press ENTER to continue to the next step.

FIGURE 4-71 POSITION UNIT #1 RPU ANTENNA TYPE PAGE

(a) FIGURE 4-72 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE is


now displayed. Select the proper port option. Press ENTER to go
to the next step.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-37


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-72 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE

2. If Option 3 (ARINC 704 IRS) is selected, the POSITION UNIT #1 IS


CONNECTED TO: page will appear. See FIGURE 4-73 POSITION
UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: (OPTION 3) PAGE. Select the prop-
er port option. Press ENTER to continue to the next step.

FIGURE 4-73 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: (OPTION 3) PAGE

(a) FIGURE 4-74 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE will appear. Select the
proper option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-74 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE

3. If Option 4 (ARINC 571 INS) is selected, press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-38


J GNS-XLS

C. The POSITION UNIT #2 IS: Page


FIGURE 4-75 POSITION UNIT #2 IS: PAGE is now displayed. Repeat Step 4.2.2.
B. The POSITION UNIT #1 IS Page for each applicable option and any further Po-
sition Unit pages that may appear. Proceed to the next step.

FIGURE 4-75 POSITION UNIT #2 IS: PAGE

D. FIGURE 4-76 DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE is now displayed. ARINC 429 or 575 may
be selected at this point.

FIGURE 4-76 DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE

E. FIGURE 4-77 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE is now displayed. Select
the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-77 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-39


J GNS-XLS

F. FIGURE 4-78 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-78 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE

G. FIGURE 4-79 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE is now displayed. Select


the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-79 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE

H. FIGURE 4-80 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-80 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-40


J GNS-XLS

I. FIGURE 4-81 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-81 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE

J. FIGURE 4-82 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-82 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE

K. FIGURE 4-83 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired option.
Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-83 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-41


J GNS-XLS

.L. FIGURE 4-84A EFIS DME ARC STYLE PAGE is now displayed. Three options ap-
pear as follows:

FIGURE 4-84A EFIS DME ARC STYLE PAGE

1. ARC AS GAP -When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the waypoints
along the arc have the GAP bit set and no waypoints or line seg-
ments are displayed along the arc.
2. ARC TO ON ARC -When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the way-
points along the arc are displayed along the arc and the TO way-
point moves along with each waypoint.
3. ARC TO AT END -When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the way-
points along the arc are displayed along the arc and the TO way-
point is the waypoint at the end of the arc.
M. FIGURE 4-84B DME ARC STYLE PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-84B DME ARC STYLE PAGE

1. SEGMENTED ARC - The aircraft will fly discrete arc segments, re-
turning to wings level once established on the segment.
2. CURVED ARC PATH - The aircraft will hold a constant bank angle
around the arc.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-42


J GNS-XLS

N. FIGURE 4-85 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO PAGE is now displayed.


Select the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-85 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO PAGE

O. FIGURE 4-86 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the
desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-86 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE

P. FIGURE 4-87 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-87 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-43


J GNS-XLS

Q. FIGURE 4-88 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the
desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-88 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS: PAGE

R. FIGURE 4-89 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-89 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE

S. FIGURE 4-90 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the
desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-90 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-44


J GNS-XLS

T. FIGURE 4-91 SIMULATOR MODE PAGE is now displayed. Select the Option 1
when configuring the aircraft. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-91 SIMULATOR MODE PAGE

CAUTION:
PLACING THE SYSTEM IN SIMULATOR
MODE IS NOT RECOMMENDED UNLESS
THE SYSTEM IS USED FOR DISPLAY PUR-
POSES ONLY. IF THE AIRCRAFT IS BEING
CHECKED OUT OR CONFIGURED FOR
FLIGHT, SELECT OPTION 1 (NOT SIMULA-
TOR) AND PRESS ENTER.

U. FIGURE 4-92 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE is now displayed.


If configuration has been previously defined, it will be displayed on this page. If this
configuration is correct, press ENTER and proceed to Step 4.4.2. V. The RADIO
TUNING CONFIGURATION Page. When entering a new configuration press the
D Key to obtain the FUEL FLOW INTERFACE page.

FIGURE 4-92 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-45


J GNS-XLS

1. The FUEL FLOW INTERFACE page is now displayed. See FIG-


URE 4-93A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1and FIGURE 4-93B
FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2. Using the D (Down) or the U
(Up) Keys to scroll through the options. When the desired option is
in the cursor field, press ENTER to obtain the appropriate set of
scaling pages.

FIGURE 4-93A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-93B FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2

(a) If Option 1 (NO SENSORS) is selected system will go to Step 4.4.2.


V. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION Page.
(b) If Option 2 (FREQUENCY) is selected the FREQUENCY SCALING
(PPH/HZ) pages appear. See FIGURE 4-94A FREQUENCY
SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-94C FREQUEN-
CY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3. Select appropriate manufacturer
and scaling by using the D or U Keys to place the option in the cur-
sor field and then press ENTER.
NOTE:
LEAR stands for J.E.T. fuel flow manufacturer and
AERO is AERO Systems.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-46


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-94A FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-94B FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-94C FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3

(c) If Option 3 (PULSE WIDTH) is selected the PULSE WIDTH SCAL-


ING (PPH/MS) pages will appear. See FIGURE 4-95A PULSE
WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-95C
PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3. Use the D or U Keys
to place the appropriate manufacturer/scaling in the cursor field and
then press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-47


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-95A PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-95B PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-95C PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-48


J GNS-XLS

(d) If Option 4 (DC AMPLITUDE) is selected the DC AMPLITUDE


SCALING (PPH/V) pages are displayed. See FIGURE 4-96A DC
AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-96I
DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT PAGE. Use the D or U Keys to
place the appropriate manufacturer/scaling in the cursor field and
then press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-96A DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-96B DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-96C DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 3

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-49


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-96D DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 4

FIGURE 4-96E DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 5

FIGURE 4-96F DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 6

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-50


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-96G DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 7

FIGURE 4-96H DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8

(1) If the USER ENTERED option is selected (FIGURE 4-96H


DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8) the page
shown in FIGURE 4-96I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT
PAGE will be displayed.

FIGURE 4-96I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT PAGE

(2) Type in any whole number value of fuel flow scaling.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-51


J GNS-XLS

(e) If Option 5 (AC AMPLITUDE) is selected, FIGURE 4-97 AC AMPLI-


TUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE will appear. Use the D or U Keys
to place the desired option in the cursor field and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-97 AC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE

(f) If Option 6 (DC COMP. FREQ) is selected, FIGURE 4-98 DC


COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE is displayed. Use
the D or U Keys to place the desired option in the cursor field and
press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-98 DC COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE

(g) FIGURE 4-99 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE is now displayed. Select


the number that corresponds to number of engines on the aircraft
and press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-52


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-99 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE

NOTE:
The number of engines vary per selected fuel flow in-
terface.

V. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION Page


FIGURE 4-100 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE is now displayed. If the
radio tuning configuration has been previously defined it will be present on this
page. If this configuration is acceptable, press ENTER and go to Step 4.2.2. W.
The NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page. If changing or entering a new configuration, press
the D Key to obtain the options list.

FIGURE 4-100 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE

1. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION pages listing the available


options is now displayed. See FIGURE 4-101A RADIO TUNING
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE through FIGURE 4-101E RA-
DIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE. Using the D
(Down) or the U (Up) Keys to scroll through the options. When the
desired option is in the cursor field and press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-53


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-101A RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE

FIGURE 4-101B RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE

FIGURE 4-101C RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-54


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-101D RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE

FIGURE 4-101E RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE

(a) If Option 1, 8, 9, 11, or 12 is selected, system will go to Step 4.2.2.


W. The NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page.
(b) If Options 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, or 13 is selected, the AUTOTUNE DIS-
ABLE SIGNAL TYPE: page will be displayed. See FIGURE 4-102
AUTOTUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE PAGE. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-102 AUTOTUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-55


J GNS-XLS

1 Select appropriate electrical input to control AUTOTUNE


DISABLE and press ENTER. See FIGURE 4-103 AUTO-
TUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF: PAGE or FIGURE 4-
104 AUTOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF: PAGE.

FIGURE 4-103 AUTOTUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF: PAGE

FIGURE 4-104 AUTOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF: PAGE

(c) If Option 7 is selected, FIGURE 4-105 VOR BEARING PAGE will be


displayed. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-105 VOR BEARING PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-56


J GNS-XLS

W. The NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page


FIGURE 4-106 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-106 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

X. FIGURE 4-107A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER. If Options 7, 8, or 9 were selected on the RADIO TUN-
ING CONFIGURATION page, go to Step 4.2.2. GG. The MAX HOLDING IAS
THROUGH 14.000 FT: Page from this point. If Option 11 or 12 was selected, pro-
ceed to next step. If any other option was selected, proceed to Step 4.2.2. Y. The
COMM 1 INSTALLED? Page.

FIGURE 4-107A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

1. If Option 2 or 3 is selected on the NAV 2 INSTALLED? page, the


page displayed in FIGURE 4-107B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS
PAGE will be displayed. Select the appropriate option.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-57


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-107B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS PAGE

Y. The COMM 1 INSTALLED? Page


FIGURE 4-108 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the de-
sired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-108 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

Z. FIGURE 4-109 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the de-
sired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-109 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-58


J GNS-XLS

AA. FIGURE 4-110 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-110 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE

BB. FIGURE 4-111 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-111 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE

CC. FIGURE 4-112 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the de-
sired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-112 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-59


J GNS-XLS

DD. FIGURE 4-113 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the de-
sired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-113 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

EE. FIGURE 4-114 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-114 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

FF. FIGURE 4-115 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-115 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-60


J GNS-XLS

GG. The MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT: Page


FIGURE 4-116 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT. PAGE is now dis-
played. Refer to Airman's Information Manual (AIM) for specific aircraft type and
applicable parameter. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-116 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT. PAGE


NOTE:
The default selection of 230 is for Civil Turbojet.

HH. FIGURE 4-117 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT. PAGE is now displayed.
Refer to Airman's Information Manual (AIM) for specific aircraft type and applicable
parameter. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-117 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT. PAGE

II. FIGURE 4-118A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE is now displayed. The FMS
uses a default bank angle limit of 30 degrees for roll steering. this bank angle
limit can be changed so as the aircraft altitude increases the limit angles are
reduced incrementally at a rate of 1 degree per 1,000 feet.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-61


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-118A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE

1. If Option 1 (DEFAULT) is selected, there will be no roll limiting


through the FMS when the ENTER key is depressed. Proceed to
Step 4.2.2. JJ The ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR Page.
2. Select Option 2 (VARIABLE) to change the bank angle limits. When
ENTER is pressed, the ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMITING page dis-
played in FIGURE 4-118B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMITING PAGE
will appear with the cursor over the Flight Level (FL) field showing a
default value of 14.

FIGURE 4-118B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMITING PAGE

3. Enter any whole number value from 14 to 22. This is the altitude at
which the bank angle will begin. Press ENTER and the cursor will
move to the High Altitude Roll Limit field as shown in FIGURE 4-
118C HIGH ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-62


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-118C HIGH ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE

4. Enter any whole number value from 15 to 25. After the value is en-
tered, the system will automatically calculate the altitude at which
the bank angle reduction will be complete. The system will reduce
the maximum bank angle in increments from 30 degrees at the Be-
gin Limiting Altitude at a rate of one degree per 1,000 feet until the
High Altitude Roll Limit is reached.
JJ The ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR Page
FIGURE 4-119 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE is now displayed. If Op-
tion 1 (DEFAULT) is selected, the recommended default gains used to compute the
roll steering commands will be used. Select Option 2 to increase the default gains
by a factor of 1.5. Select Option 3 to increase the default gains by a factor of 2.0.
NOTE:
In some installations an increase in the roll steering
gains may improve the lateral tracking performance
of the system.

FIGURE 4-119 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-63


J GNS-XLS

CAUTION:
THE DEFAULT ROLL STEERING GAINS REP-
RESENT A COMPROMISE IN RIDE COM-
FORT AND TRACKING PERFORMANCE. IT
IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE DEFAULT
ROLL STEERING GAINS BE USED UNLESS
FLIGHT TEST DATA INDICATES THAT THE
LATERAL TRACKING PERFORMANCE MAY
BE IMPROVED BY INCREASED ROLL
STEERING GAINS. INCREASING THE GAINS
IN SOME INSTALLATIONS MAY DEGRADE
THE TRACKING PERFORMANCE OF THE
SYSTEM.
KK. FIGURE 4-120 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect YES or NO then press ENTER. System Configuration is now complete.

FIGURE 4-120 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE

4.2.3 CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED (DISCRETE WOG)


A. FIGURE 4-121 THIS FMS IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the option desired.
Press ENTER to continue to the next step.

FIGURE 4-121 THIS FMS IS: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-64


J GNS-XLS

B. The POSITION UNIT #1 IS Page


FIGURE 4-122 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the option
desired. Press ENTER to continue to the next step. If option 1 is selected indicat-
ing position unit #1 is not used, the page for position unit #2 will appear next. Pro-
ceed to Step 4.2.3. C. The POSITION UNIT #2 IS: Page.

FIGURE 4-122 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE

1. If Option 2 (RPU) is selected, the POSITION UNIT #1 RPU ANTEN-


NA TYPE page will appear. See FIGURE 4-123 POSITION UNIT
#1 RPU ANTENNA TYPE PAGE. Select the proper antenna type.
Press ENTER to continue to the next step.

FIGURE 4-123 POSITION UNIT #1 RPU ANTENNA TYPE PAGE

(a) FIGURE 4-124 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE is


now displayed. Select the proper port option. Press ENTER to go
to the next step.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-65


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-124 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE

2. If Option 3 (ARINC 704 IRS) is selected, FIGURE 4-125 POSITION


UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: (OPTION 3) PAGE will appear. Se-
lect the proper port option. Press ENTER to continue to the next
step.

FIGURE 4-125 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: (OPTION 3) PAGE

(a) FIGURE 4-126 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE will appear. Select
the proper option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-126 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE

3. If Option 4 (ARINC 571 INS) is selected, press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-66


J GNS-XLS

C. The POSITION UNIT #2 IS: Page


FIGURE 4-127 POSITION UNIT #2 IS: PAGE is now displayed. Repeat Step
4.2.3. B. The POSITION UNIT #1 IS Page for each applicable option and any fur-
ther Position Unit pages that may appear. Proceed to the next step.

FIGURE 4-127 POSITION UNIT #2 IS: PAGE

D. FIGURE 4-128 DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE is now displayed. ARINC 429 or 575 may
be selected at this point.

FIGURE 4-128 DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE

E. FIGURE 4-129 WEIGHT ON GEAR PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.
NOTE:
ACTIVE HI signifies ground in the air. ACTIVE LOW
signifies ground on the ground.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-67


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-129 WEIGHT ON GEAR PAGE

F. FIGURE 4-130 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-130 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE

G. FIGURE 4-131 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-131 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-68


J GNS-XLS

H. FIGURE 4-132 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE is now displayed. Select


the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-132 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE

I. FIGURE 4-133 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-133 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE

J. FIGURE 4-134 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-134 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-69


J GNS-XLS

K. FIGURE 4-135 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-135 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE

L. FIGURE 4-136 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-136 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE

M. FIGURE 4-137A EFIS DME ARC STYLE PAGE is now displayed. Three options
appear as follows:

FIGURE 4-137A EFIS DME ARC STYLE PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-70


J GNS-XLS

1. ARC AS GAP - When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the waypoints
along the arc have the GAP bit set and no waypoints or line seg-
ments are displayed along the arc.
2. ARC TO ON ARC - When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the way-
points along with each waypoint.
3. ARC TO AT END - When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the way-
points along the arc are displayed along the arc and the TO way-
point is the waypoint at the end of the arc.
N. FIGURE 4-137B DME ARC STYLE PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-137B DME ARC STYLE PAGE

1. SEGMENTED ARC - The aircraft will fly discrete arc segments, re-
turning to wings level once established on the segment.
2. CURVED ARC PATH - The aircraft will hold a constant bank angle
around the arc.
O. FIGURE 4-138 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE is now displayed.
Select the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-138 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-71


J GNS-XLS

P. FIGURE 4-139 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the
desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-139 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE

Q. FIGURE 4-140 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-140 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE

R. FIGURE 4-141 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select
the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-141 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-72


J GNS-XLS

S. FIGURE 4-142 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-142 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE

T. FIGURE 4-143 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the
desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-143 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS: PAGE

U. FIGURE 4-144 SIMULATOR MODE PAGE is now displayed. Select Option 1


when configuring the aircraft. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-144 SIMULATOR MODE PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-73


J GNS-XLS

CAUTION:
PLACING THE SYSTEM IN SIMULATOR
MODE IS NOT RECOMMENDED UNLESS
THE SYSTEM IS USED FOR DISPLAY PUR-
POSES ONLY. IF THE AIRCRAFT IS BEING
CHECKED OUT OR CONFIGURED FOR
FLIGHT, SELECT OPTION 1 (NOT SIMULA-
TOR) AND PRESS ENTER.
V. FIGURE 4-145 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE is now dis-
played. If configuration has been previously defined, it will be displayed on this
page. If this configuration is correct, press ENTER and proceed to Step 4.2.3. W.
The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION Page. When entering a new configura-
tion press the D Key to obtain the FUEL FLOW INTERFACE page.

FIGURE 4-145 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE

1. The FUEL FLOW INTERFACE page is now displayed. See FIG-


URE 4-146A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1 and FIGURE 4-
146B FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2. Using the D (Down) or
the U (Up) Keys to scroll through the options. When the desired op-
tion is in the cursor field, press ENTER to obtain the appropriate set
of scaling pages.

FIGURE 4-146A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-74


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-146B FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2

(a) If Option 1 (NO SENSORS) is selected system will go to Step 4.2.3.


W. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION Page.
(b) If Option 2 (FREQUENCY) is selected the FREQUENCY SCALING
(PPH/HZ) pages appear. See FIGURE 4-147A FREQUENCY
SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-147C FREQUEN-
CY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3. Select appropriate manufacturer
and scaling by using the D or U Keys to place the option in the cur-
sor field and then press ENTER.
NOTE:
LEAR stands for J.E.T. fuel flow manufacturer and
AERO is AERO Systems.

FIGURE 4-147A FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-75


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-147B FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-147C FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3

(c) If Option 3 (PULSE WIDTH) is selected the PULSE WIDTH SCAL-


ING (PPH/MS) pages will appear. See FIGURE 4-148A PULSE
WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-148C
PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3. Use the D or U Keys
to place the appropriate manufacturer/scaling in the cursor field and
then press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-148A PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-76


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-148B PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-148C PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3

(d) If Option 4 (DC AMPLITUDE) is selected the DC AMPLITUDE


SCALING (PPH/V) pages are displayed. See FIGURE 4-149A DC
AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-149I
DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT. Use the D or U Keys to place the
appropriate manufacturer/scaling in the cursor field and then press
ENTER.

FIGURE 4-149A DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-77


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-149B DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-149C DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 3

FIGURE 4-149D DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 4

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-78


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-149E DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 5

FIGURE 4-149F DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 6

FIGURE 4-149G DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 7

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-79


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-149H DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8

(1) If the USER ENTERED option is selected (FIGURE 4-149H


DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8), the page
shown in FIGURE 4-149I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT
will be displayed.

FIGURE 4-149I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT

(2) Type in any whole number value of fuel flow scaling.


(e) If Option 5 (AC AMPLITUDE) is selected the AC AMPLITUDE
SCALING (PPH/V) page will appear. See FIGURE 4-150 AC AM-
PLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE. Use the D or U Keys to place
the desired option in the cursor field and press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-80


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-150 AC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE

(f) If Option 6 (DC COMP. FREQ) is selected, FIGURE 4-151 DC


COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE is displayed. Use
the D or U Keys to place the desired option in the cursor field and
press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-151 DC COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE

(g) FIGURE 4-152 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE is now displayed. Select


the number that corresponds to number of engines on the aircraft
and press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-81


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-152 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE

NOTE:
The number of engines vary per selected fuel flow in-
terface.

W. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION Page


FIGURE 4-153 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE is now displayed. If the
radio tuning configuration has been previously defined it will be present on this
page. If this configuration is acceptable, press ENTER and go to Step 4.2.3. X. The
NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page. If changing or entering a new configuration, press the
D Key to obtain the options list.

FIGURE 4-153 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE

1. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION pages listing the available


options is now displayed. See FIGURE 4-154A RADIO TUNING
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-154E
RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 5. Using the
D (Down) or the U (Up) Keys to scroll through the options. When
the desired option is in the cursor field and press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-82


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-154A RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-154B RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-154C RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 3

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-83


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-154D RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 4

FIGURE 4-154E RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 5

(a) If Option 1, 8, 9, 11, or 12 is selected, the system will go to Step


4.2.3. X. The NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page.
(b) If Options 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, or 13 is selected FIGURE 4-155 AUTO-
TUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE will be displayed. Select the de-
sired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-155 AUTOTUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-84


J GNS-XLS

(1) Select appropriate electrical input to control AUTOTUNE


DISABLE and press ENTER. See FIGURE 4-156 AUTO-
TUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF: PAGE or FIGURE 4-
157 AUTOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF PAGE.

FIGURE 4-156 AUTOTUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF: PAGE

FIGURE 4-157 AUTOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF PAGE

(c) If Option 7 is selected, FIGURE 4-158 VOR BEARING: PAGE will


be displayed. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-158 VOR BEARING: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-85


J GNS-XLS

X. The NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page


FIGURE 4-159 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-159 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

Y. FIGURE 4-160A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER. If Options 7, 8, or 9 were selected on the RADIO TUN-
ING CONFIGURATION page, go to Step 4.2.3. HH. The COMM 1 INSTALLED?
Page from this point. If Option 11 or 12 was selected, proceed to next step. If any
other option was selected, proceed to Step 4.2.3. Z. The COMM 1 INSTALLED?
Page.

FIGURE 4-160A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

1. If Option 2 or 3 is selected on the NAV 2 INSTALLED? page, the


page displayed in FIGURE 4-160B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS
PAGE will be displayed. Select the appropriate option.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-86


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-160B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS PAGE

Z. The COMM 1 INSTALLED? Page


FIGURE 4-161 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the de-
sired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-161 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

AA. FIGURE 4-162 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-162 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-87


J GNS-XLS

BB. FIGURE 4-163 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-163 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE

CC FIGURE 4-164 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-164 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE

DD. FIGURE 4-165 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the de-
sired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-165 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-88


J GNS-XLS

EE. FIGURE 4-166 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the de-
sired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-166 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

FF. FIGURE 4-167 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-167 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

GG. FIGURE 4-168 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-168 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-89


J GNS-XLS

HH. The COMM 1 INSTALLED? Page


FIGURE 4-169 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT PAGE is now dis-
played. Refer to Airman's Information Manual (AIM) for specific aircraft type and
applicable parameter. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-169 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT PAGE

II. FIGURE 4-170 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT PAGE is now displayed.
Refer to Airman's Information Manual (AIM) for specific aircraft type and applicable
parameter. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-170 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT PAGE

NOTE:
The default selection of 230 is for Civil Turbojet.

JJ. FIGURE 4-171A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE is now displayed. The FMS uses a
default bank angle limit of 30 degrees for roll steering. this bank angle limit can be
changed so as the aircraft altitude increases the limit angles are reduced incremen-
tally at a rate of 1 degree per 1,000 feet.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-90


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-171A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE

1. If Option 1 (DEFAULT) is selected, there will be no roll limiting


through the FMS when the ENTER key is depressed. Proceed to
Step 4.2.3. KK. The ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR Page.
2. Select Option 2 (VARIABLE) to change the bank angle limits. When
ENTER is pressed, FIGURE 4-171B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMIT-
ING PAGE will appear with the cursor over the Flight Level (FL) field
showing a default value of 14.

FIGURE 4-171B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMITING PAGE

3. Enter any whole number value from 14 to 22. This is the altitude at
which the bank angle will begin. Press ENTER and the cursor will
move to the High Altitude Roll Limit field as shown in FIGURE 4-
171C HIGH ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-91


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-171C HIGH ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE

4. Enter any whole number value from 15 to 25. After the value is en-
tered, the system will automatically calculate the altitude at which
the bank angle reduction will be complete. The system will reduce
the maximum bank angle in increments from 30 degrees at the Be-
gin Limiting Altitude at a rate of one degree per 1,000 feet until the
High Altitude Roll Limit is reached.
KK. The ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR Page
FIGURE 4-172 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE is now displayed. If Op-
tion 1 (DEFAULT) is selected, the recommended default gains used to compute
the roll steering commands will be used. Select Option 2 to increase the default
gains by a factor of 1.5. Select Option 3 to increase the default gains by a factor
of 2.0.
NOTE:
In some installations an increase in the roll steering
gains may improve the lateral tracking performance
of the system.

FIGURE 4-172 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-92


J GNS-XLS

CAUTION:
THE DEFAULT ROLL STEERING GAINS REP-
RESENT A COMPROMISE IN RIDE COM-
FORT AND TRACKING PERFORMANCE. IT
IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE DEFAULT
ROLL STEERING GAINS BE USED UNLESS
FLIGHT TEST DATA INDICATES THAT THE
LATERAL TRACKING PERFORMANCE MAY
BE IMPROVED BY INCREASED ROLL
STEERING GAINS. INCREASING THE GAINS
IN SOME INSTALLATIONS MAY DEGRADE
THE TRACKING PERFORMANCE OF THE
SYSTEM.
LL. FIGURE 4-173 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect YES or NO then press ENTER. System Configuration is now complete.

FIGURE 4-173 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-93


J GNS-XLS

4.3 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE (-0203)


(Applicable to CDU P/N 17960-0203-XXXX Only)
A. Turn system on.
B. The SELF TEST page is displayed as the system performs a self test. See FIG-
URE 4-201 SELF TEST PAGE. When the test is successful, the INITIALIZATION
page will appear.

FIGURE 4-201 SELF TEST PAGE

C. On FIGURE 4-202 INITIALIZATION PAGE, insert 357777 in the DATE field and
press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-202 INITIALIZATION PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-94


J GNS-XLS

D. FIGURE 4-203 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE is now displayed.

FIGURE 4-203 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE

4.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE (-0203)


(Applicable to CDU P/N 17960-0203-XXXX Only)
A. Select Option 1, CONFIG. CHECK. See FIGURE 4-204 INSTALLATION TEST
PAGE.

FIGURE 4-204 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE

B. Press the ENTER Key.


C. FIGURE 4-205 READ/CHANGE CONFIGURATION OF PAGE will appear. The
dates of previously entered configurations are shown in Options 1 through 3. Op-
tion 4 allows a new configuration to be entered. The newest previously entered
configuration is shown in Option 1.
D. Select the appropriate option and press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-95


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-205 READ/CHANGE CONFIGURATION OF PAGE

E FIGURE 4-206 CONFIGURATION DISPLAY FORMAT PAGE appears. To create


a new configuration or modify a previously programmed configuration in the clear
text (UNPACKED) version: select 1, press ENTER and proceed to Step 4.4. G. The
AFIS INSTALLED? Page.

FIGURE 4-206 CONFIGURATION DISPLAY FORMAT PAGE

NOTE:
PACKED: This option displays the hexadecimal
equivalents of the previously selected configuration
options. See FIGURE 4-207 CONFIGURATION
CODE PAGE.
UNPACKED: This option presents the clear text pro-
gram for configuration selection.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-96


J GNS-XLS

CAUTION:
THE "PACKED" REPRESENTATION OF THE
CONFIGURATION DATA DOES NOT DIS-
PLAY ALL CONFIGURATION OPTIONS SE-
LECTED. TO REVIEW AND SELECT ALL
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS, USE THE "UN-
PACKED" DISPLAY OPTION.

FIGURE 4-207 CONFIGURATION CODE PAGE

F. Select option 1 and press ENTER. See FIGURE 4-206 CONFIGURATION DIS-
PLAY FORMAT PAGE.
G. The AFIS INSTALLED? Page
FIGURE 4-208 AFIS INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select whether the
Airborne Flight Information System (AFIS) is not installed, installed with text only,
or installed with weather graphics and press ENTER. Press ENTER to continue
to the next step.

FIGURE 4-208 AFIS INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-97


J GNS-XLS

H. FIGURE 4-209 CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED PAGE is now dis-


played. Select the option desired. Press ENTER to continue to the next step. If
option 1 is selected, proceed to Section 4.4.1 NO CONCENTRATED DATA BUS
INSTALLED. If option 2 is selected, proceed to Section 4.4.2 CONCENTRATED
DATA BUS INSTALLED (CDB WOG). If option 3 is selected, proceed to 4.4.3
CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED (DISCRETE WOG).

FIGURE 4-209 CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED PAGE

4.4.1 NO CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED


A. FIGURE 4-210 THIS FMS IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the option desired.
Press ENTER to continue to the next step.

FIGURE 4-210 THIS FMS IS: PAGE

B. The POSITION UNIT #1 IS: Page


FIGURE 4-211 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the option
desired. Press ENTER to continue to the next step. If option 1 is selected, indicat-
ing position unit #1 is not used, the page for position unit #2 will appear next. Pro-
ceed to Step 4.4.1. C. The POSITION UNIT #2 IS: Page.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-98


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-211 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE

NOTE:
Not all options shown will be available for a particular
aircraft configuration.

1. If Option 2 (ARINC 743 GPS) is selected, FIGURE 4-212 POSI-


TION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE will appear. Select the
proper port option. Press ENTER to continue to the next step.

FIGURE 4-212 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE

(a) FIGURE 4-213 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the proper external GPS option. Press ENTER to go to the next
step.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-99


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-213 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE

NOTE:
GPS #1 and GPS #2 are for GPS sensors external
to the GNS-XLS. The internal GPS receiver is not an
option on this screen.

2. If Option 3 (ARINC 704 IRS) is selected, FIGURE 4-214 POSITION


UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE will appear. Select the proper
port option. Press ENTER to continue to the next step.

FIGURE 4-214 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE

(a) FIGURE 4-215 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE will appear. Select
the proper option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-100


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-215 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE

3. If Option 4 (ARINC 571 INS) is selected, press ENTER.


C. The POSITION UNIT #2 IS: Page
FIGURE 4-216 POSITION UNIT #2 IS: PAGE is now displayed. Repeat Step
4.4.1. B. The POSITION UNIT #1 IS: Page for each applicable option and any fur-
ther Position Unit pages that may appear. Proceed to the next step.

FIGURE 4-216 POSITION UNIT #2 IS: PAGE

D. FIGURE 4-217 COMPASS HEADING PAGE is now displayed. Select the proper
option (if an IRS was previously selected, select NOT USED). Press ENTER to go
to the next step

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-101


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-217 COMPASS HEADING PAGE

E. FIGURE 4-218 TAS INTERFACE PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-218 TAS INTERFACE PAGE

NOTE:
If Option 5 (DIGITAL) is selected and the ENTER
key is pressed, an additional page will appear after
the ALT. RATE INTRF. page. See FIGURE 4-221
DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE. ARINC 429 or 575 may
be selected at this point.

F. FIGURE 4-219 ALT. INTERFACE PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-102


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-219 ALT. INTERFACE PAGE

NOTE:
If Option 4 (DIGITAL) is selected and the ENTER
Key is pressed an additional page will appear after
the ALT. RATE INTRF. page. See FIGURE 4-221
DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE. ARINC 429 or 575 may
be selected at this point.

G. FIGURE 4-220 ALT. RATE INTRF. PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-220 ALT. RATE INTRF. PAGE

NOTE:
If Option 3 (DIGITAL) is selected and the ENTER
Key is pressed an additional page will appear after
the ALT. RATE INTRF. page. See FIGURE 4-221
DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE. ARINC 429 or 575 may
be selected at this point.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-103


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-221 DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE

H. FIGURE 4-222 WEIGHT ON GEAR PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-222 WEIGHT ON GEAR PAGE

NOTE:
ACTIVE HI is chosen if the strut switch is open while
the aircraft is on the ground. ACTIVE LOW is cho-
sen if the strut switch is grounded while the aircraft is
on the ground.

I. FIGURE 4-223 ALT. PRESELECTOR INTERFACE TYPE PAGE is now displayed.


Select the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-104


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-223 ALT. PRESELECTOR INTERFACE TYPE PAGE

1. If Option 4 (ANALOG) is selected, FIGURE 4-224 ALT. PRESE-


LECTOR SCALING PAGE will appear. Select the desired scaling
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-224 ALT. PRESELECTOR SCALING PAGE

J. FIGURE 4-225 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-225 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-105


J GNS-XLS

K. FIGURE 4-226 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-226 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE

L. FIGURE 4-227 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE is now displayed. Select


the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-227 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE

M. FIGURE 4-228 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-228 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-106


J GNS-XLS

N. FIGURE 4-229 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-229 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE

O. FIGURE 4-230 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-230 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE

P. FIGURE 4-231 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-231 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-107


J GNS-XLS

Q. FIGURE 4-232A EFIS DME ARC STYLE PAGE is now displayed. Three options
appear as follows:

FIGURE 4-232A EFIS DME ARC STYLE PAGE

1. ARC AS GAP - When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the waypoints
along the arc have the GAP bit set and no waypoints or line seg-
ments are displayed along the arc.
2. ARC TO ON ARC - When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the way-
points along the arc are displayed along the arc and the TO way-
point moves along with each waypoint.
3. ARC TO AT END - When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the way-
points along the arc are displayed along the arc and the TO way-
point is the waypoint at the end of the arc.
R. FIGURE 4-232B DME ARC STYLE PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-232B DME ARC STYLE PAGE

1. SEGMENTED ARC - The aircraft will fly discrete arc segments, re-
turning to wings level once established on the segment.
2. CURVED ARC PATH - The aircraft will hold a constant bank angle
around the arc.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-108


J GNS-XLS

S. The HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: page is now displayed. See FIG-
URE 4-233 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-233 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE

T. FIGURE 4-234 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the
desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-234 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE

U. FIGURE 4-235 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-235 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-109


J GNS-XLS

V. FIGURE 4-236 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select
the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-236 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS: PAGE

W. FIGURE 4-237 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-237 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE

X. FIGURE 4-238 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the
desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-238 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-110


J GNS-XLS

Y. FIGURE 4-239 SIMULATOR MODE PAGE is now displayed. Select the Option 1
when configuring the aircraft. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-239 SIMULATOR MODE PAGE

CAUTION:
PLACING THE SYSTEM IN SIMULATOR
MODE IS NOT RECOMMENDED UNLESS
THE SYSTEM IS USED FOR DISPLAY PUR-
POSES ONLY. IF THE AIRCRAFT IS BEING
CHECKED OUT OR CONFIGURED FOR
FLIGHT, SELECT OPTION 1 (NOT SIMULA-
TOR) AND PRESS ENTER.
Z. FIGURE 4-240 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE is now dis-
played. If configuration has been previously defined, it will be displayed on this
page. If this configuration is correct, press ENTER and proceed to Step 4.4.1. AA.
The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION Page. When entering a new configura-
tion press the D Key to obtain the FUEL FLOW INTERFACE page.

FIGURE 4-240 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-111


J GNS-XLS

1. The FUEL FLOW INTERFACE page is now displayed. See FIG-


URE 4-241A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1 and FIGURE 4-
241B FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2. Using the D (Down) or
the U (Up) Keys to scroll through the options. When the desired op-
tion is in the cursor field, press ENTER to obtain the appropriate set
of scaling pages.

FIGURE 4-241A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-241B FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2

(a) If Option 1 (NO SENSORS) is selected system will go to Step 4.4.1.


AA. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION Page.
(b) If Option 2 (FREQUENCY) is selected the FREQUENCY SCALING
(PPH/HZ) pages appear. See FIGURE 4-242A FREQUENCY
SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-242C FREQUEN-
CY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3. Select appropriate manufacturer
and scaling by using the D or U Keys to place the option in the cur-
sor field and then press ENTER.
NOTE:
LEAR stands for J.E.T. fuel flow manufacturer and
AERO is AERO Systems.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-112


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-242A FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-242B FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-242C FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3

(c) If Option 3 (PULSE WIDTH) is selected the PULSE WIDTH SCAL-


ING (PPH/MS) pages will appear. See FIGURE 4-243A PULSE
WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-243C
PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3. Use the D or U Keys
to place the appropriate manufacturer/scaling in the cursor field and
then press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-113


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-243A PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-243B PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-243C PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-114


J GNS-XLS

(d) If Option 4 (DC AMPLITUDE) is selected the DC AMPLITUDE


SCALING (PPH/V) pages are displayed. See FIGURE 4-244A DC
AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-244I
DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT. Use the D or U Keys to place the
appropriate manufacturer/scaling in the cursor field and then press
ENTER.

FIGURE 4-244A DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-244B DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-244C DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 3

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-115


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-244D DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 4

FIGURE 4-244E DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 5

FIGURE 4-244F DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 6

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-116


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-244G DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 7

FIGURE 4-244H DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8

(1) If the USER ENTERED option is selected (FIGURE 4-244H


DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8) the page
shown in FIGURE 4-244I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT
will be displayed.

FIGURE 4-244I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT

(2) Type in any whole number value of fuel flow scaling.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-117


J GNS-XLS

(e) If Option 5 (AC AMPLITUDE) is selected, FIGURE 4-245 AC AM-


PLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE will appear. Use the D or U
Keys to place the desired option in the cursor field and press EN-
TER.

FIGURE 4-245 AC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE

(f) If Option 6 (DC COMP. FREQ) is selected, FIGURE 4-246 DC


COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE is displayed. Use
the D or U Keys to place the desired option in the cursor field and
press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-246 DC COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE

(g) FIGURE 4-247 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE is now displayed. Select


the number that corresponds to number of engines on the aircraft
and press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-118


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-247 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE

NOTE:
The number of engines vary per selected fuel flow in-
terface.

AA. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION Page


. FIGURE 4-248 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE is now displayed. If the
radio tuning configuration has been previously defined it will be present on this
page. If this configuration is acceptable, press ENTER and go to Step 4.4.1. BB.
The NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page. If changing or entering a new configuration, press
the D Key to obtain the options list.

FIGURE 4-248 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE

1. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION pages listing the available


options is now displayed. See FIGURE 4-249A RADIO TUNING
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-249E
RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 5. Using the
D (Down) or the U (Up) Keys to scroll through the options. When
the desired option is in the cursor field and press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-119


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-249A RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-249B RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-249C RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 3

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-120


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-249D RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 4

FIGURE 4-249E RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 5

(a) If Option 1, 8, 9, 11, or 12 is selected, the system will go to Step


4.4.1. BB. The NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page.
(b) If Option 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, or 13 is selected, FIGURE 4-250 AUTO-
TUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE PAGE will be displayed. Select the
desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-250 AUTOTUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-121


J GNS-XLS

(1) Select appropriate electrical input to control AUTOTUNE


DISABLE and press ENTER. See FIGURE 4-251 AUTO-
TUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF: PAGE or FIGURE 4-
252 AUTOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF: PAGE.

FIGURE 4-251 AUTOTUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF: PAGE

FIGURE 4-252 AUTOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF: PAGE

(c) If Option 7 is selected, FIGURE 4-253 VOR BEARING PAGE will be


displayed. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-253 VOR BEARING PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-122


J GNS-XLS

BB. The NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page


FIGURE 4-254 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-254 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

CC. FIGURE 4-255A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER. If Options 7, 8, or 9 were selected on the RADIO TUN-
ING CONFIGURATION page, go to Step 4.4.1. KK. The ADF 2 INSTALLED? Page
from this point. If Option 11 or 12 was selected, proceed to next step. If any other
option was selected, proceed to Step 4.4.1. DD. The COMM 1 INSTALLED? Page.

FIGURE 4-255A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

1. If Option 2 or 3 is selected on the NAV 2 INSTALLED? page, the


page displayed in FIGURE 4-255B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS
PAGE will be displayed. Select the appropriate option.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-123


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-255B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS PAGE

DD. The COMM 1 INSTALLED? Page


FIGURE 4-256 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-256 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

EE. FIGURE 4-257 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-257 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-124


J GNS-XLS

FF. FIGURE 4-258 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE: page is now displayed.
Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-258 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE

GG FIGURE 4-259 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-259 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE

HH FIGURE 4-260 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the de-
sired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-260 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-125


J GNS-XLS

II. FIGURE 4-261 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the de-
sired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-261 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

JJ. FIGURE 4-262 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-262 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

KK. The ADF 2 INSTALLED? Page


FIGURE 4-263 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-263 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-126


J GNS-XLS

LL. FIGURE 4-264 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT PAGE is now dis-
played. Refer to Airman's Information Manual (AIM) for specific aircraft type and
applicable parameter. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-264 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT PAGE

NOTE:
The default selection of 230 is for Civil Turbojet.

MM. FIGURE 4-265 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT PAGE is now displayed.
Refer to Airman's Information Manual (AIM) for specific aircraft type and applicable
parameter. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-265 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT PAGE

NN. FIGURE 4-266A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE is now displayed. The FMS uses a
default bank angle limit of 30 degrees for roll steering. this bank angle limit can be
changed so as the aircraft altitude increases the limit angles are reduced incremen-
tally at a rate of 1 degree per 1,000 feet.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-127


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-266A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE

NOTE:
Option 3 EXPANDED BANK ANGLE is only for
those autopilots that can accept the EXPANDED
range.

1. If Option 1 (DEFAULT) is selected, there will be no roll limiting


through the FMS when the ENTER key is depressed. Proceed to
Step 4.4.1. OO. The ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR Page.
2. Select Option 2 (VARIABLE) to change the bank angle limits. When
ENTER is pressed, FIGURE 4-266B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMIT-
ING PAGE will appear with the cursor over the Flight Level (FL) field
showing a default value of 14.

FIGURE 4-266B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMITING PAGE

3. Enter any whole number value from 14 to 22. This is the altitude at
which the bank angle will begin. Press ENTER and the cursor will
move to the High Altitude Roll Limit field as shown in FIGURE 4-
266C ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-128


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-266C ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE

4. Enter any whole number value from 15 to 25. After the value is en-
tered, the system will automatically calculate the altitude at which
the bank angle reduction will be complete. The system will reduce
the maximum bank angle in increments from 30 degrees at the Be-
gin Limiting Altitude at a rate of one degree per 1,000 feet until the
High Altitude Roll Limit is reached.
OO. The ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR Page
FIGURE 4-267 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE is now displayed. If Op-
tion 1 (DEFAULT) is selected, the recommended default gains used to compute the
roll steering commands will be used. Select Option 2 to increase the default gains
by a factor of 1.5. Select Option 3 to increase the default gains by a factor of 2.0.
NOTE:
In some installations an increase in the roll steering
gains may improve the lateral tracking performance
of the system. The default roll steering gains repre-
sent a compromise in ride comfort and tracking per-
formance.

FIGURE 4-267 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-129


J GNS-XLS

CAUTION:
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE DEFAULT
ROLL STEERING GAINS BE USED UNLESS
FLIGHT TEST DATA INDICATES THAT THE
LATERAL TRACKING PERFORMANCE MAY
BE IMPROVED BY INCREASED ROLL
STEERING GAINS. INCREASING THE GAINS
IN SOME INSTALLATIONS MAY DEGRADE
THE TRACKING PERFORMANCE OF THE
SYSTEM.
PP. FIGURE 4-267A SEARCH AND RESCUE PAGE is now displayed. If SEARCH
AND RESCUE is allowed in flight planning selections, select Option 2 ENABLED.

FIGURE 4-267A SEARCH AND RESCUE PAGE

QQ. If SEARCH AND RESCUE is enabled, FIGURE 4-267B EXTERNAL WAYPOINT


PAGE will appear. Select Option 1 EXTERNAL for external waypoints to be han-
dled normally (DIRECT TO EXTERNAL WAYPOINT). Select Option 2 TARGET
for external waypoints to be handled as TARGET waypoints (T001 in FPL 56).

FIGURE 4-267B EXTERNAL WAYPOINT PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-130


J GNS-XLS

RR. If SEARCH AND RESCUE is enabled, FIGURE 4-267C DATUM PLAN PAGE will
appear. This page allows the TOKYO DATUM calculation page in the PLAN sec-
tion of the FMS. If the TOKYO DATUM page is to appear select Option 2 EN-
ABLED. The TOKYO DATUM page converts latitudes and longitudes from WGS-
84 to TOKYO DATUMS.

FIGURE 4-267C DATUM PLAN PAGE

SS. FIGURE 4-267D EGPWS TERRAIN DISPLAY ON FMS PAGE is now displayed.
This page enables the display of TERRAIN data on the GNS-XLS. Contact a cus-
tomer representative to determine EGPWS compatible sources of TERRAIN data.

FIGURE 4-267D EGPWS TERRAIN DISPLAY ON FMS PAGE

TT. FIGURE 4-268 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect YES or NO then press ENTER. System Configuration is now complete.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-131


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-268 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE

4.4.2 CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED (CDB WOG)


A. FIGURE 4-269 THIS FMS IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the option desired.
Press ENTER to continue to the next step.

FIGURE 4-269 THIS FMS IS: PAGE

B. The POSITION UNIT #1 IS Page


FIGURE 4-270 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the option
desired. Press ENTER to continue to the next step. If option 1 is selected, indicat-
ing position unit #1 is not used, the page for position unit #2 will appear next. Pro-
ceed to Step 4.4.2. C. The POSITION UNIT #2 IS: Page.

FIGURE 4-270 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-132


J GNS-XLS

1. If Option 2 (ARINC 743 GPS) is selected, FIGURE 4-271 POSI-


TION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE will appear. Select the
proper port option. Press ENTER to continue to the next step.

FIGURE 4-271 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE

(a) FIGURE 4-272 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the proper external GPS option. Press ENTER to go to the next
step.

FIGURE 4-272 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE

NOTE:
GPS #1 and GPS #2 are for GPS sensors external
to the GNS-XLS. The internal GPS receiver is not an
option on this screen.

2. If Option 3 (ARINC 704 IRS) is selected,FIGURE 4-273 POSITION


UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE will appear. See . Select the
proper port option. Press ENTER to continue to the next step.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-133


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-273 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE

(a) FIGURE 4-274 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE will appear. Select
the proper option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-274 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE

3. If Option 4 (ARINC 571 INS) is selected, press ENTER.


C. The POSITION UNIT #2 IS: Page
FIGURE 4-275 POSITION UNIT #2 IS: PAGE is now displayed. Repeat Step
4.4.2. B. The POSITION UNIT #1 IS Page for each applicable option and any fur-
ther Position Unit pages that may appear. Proceed to the next step.

FIGURE 4-275 POSITION UNIT #2 IS: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-134


J GNS-XLS

D. FIGURE 4-276 DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE is now displayed. ARINC 429 or 575 may
be selected at this point.

FIGURE 4-276 DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE

E. FIGURE 4-277 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-277 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE

F. FIGURE 4-278 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-278 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-135


J GNS-XLS

G. FIGURE 4-279 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE is now displayed. Select


the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-279 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE

H. FIGURE 4-280 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-280 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE

I. FIGURE 4-281 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-281 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-136


J GNS-XLS

J. FIGURE 4-282 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-282 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE

K. FIGURE 4-283 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-283 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE

L. FIGURE 4-266A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE is now displayed. Three options ap-
pear as follows:

FIGURE 4-284A EFIS DME ARC STYLE PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-137


J GNS-XLS

1. ARC AS GAP -When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the waypoints
along the arc have the GAP bit set and no waypoints or line seg-
ments are displayed along the arc.
2. ARC TO ON ARC -When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the way-
points along the arc are displayed along the arc and the TO way-
point moves along with each waypoint.
3. ARC TO AT END -When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the way-
points along the arc are displayed along the arc and the TO way-
point is the waypoint at the end of the arc.
M. FIGURE 4-284B DME ARC STYLE PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-284B DME ARC STYLE PAGE

1. SEGMENTED ARC - The aircraft will fly discrete arc segments, re-
turning to wings level once established on the segment.
2. CURVED ARC PATH - The aircraft will hold a constant bank angle
around the arc.
N. FIGURE 4-285 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE is now displayed.
Select the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-285 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-138


J GNS-XLS

O. FIGURE 4-286 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the
desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-286 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE

P. FIGURE 4-287 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-287 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE

Q. FIGURE 4-288 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select
the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-288 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-139


J GNS-XLS

R. FIGURE 4-289 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-289 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE

S. FIGURE 4-290 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the
desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-290 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS: PAGE

T. FIGURE 4-291 SIMULATOR MODE: PAGE is now displayed. Select the Option 1
when configuring the aircraft. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-291 SIMULATOR MODE: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-140


J GNS-XLS

CAUTION:
PLACING THE SYSTEM IN SIMULATOR
MODE IS NOT RECOMMENDED UNLESS
THE SYSTEM IS USED FOR DISPLAY PUR-
POSES ONLY. IF THE AIRCRAFT IS BEING
CHECKED OUT OR CONFIGURED FOR
FLIGHT, SELECT OPTION 1 (NOT SIMULA-
TOR) AND PRESS ENTER.
U. FIGURE 4-292 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE is now dis-
played. If configuration has been previously defined, it will be displayed on this
page. If this configuration is correct, press ENTER and proceed to Step 4.4.2. V.
The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION Page. When entering a new configura-
tion press the D Key to obtain the FUEL FLOW INTERFACE page.

FIGURE 4-292 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE

1. The FUEL FLOW INTERFACE page is now displayed. See FIG-


URE 4-293A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1 and FIGURE 4-
293B FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2. Using the D (Down) or
the U (Up) Keys to scroll through the options. When the desired op-
tion is in the cursor field, press ENTER to obtain the appropriate set
of scaling pages.

FIGURE 4-293A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-141


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-293B FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2

(a) If Option 1 (NO SENSORS) is selected system will go to Step 4.4.2.


V. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION Page.
(b) If Option 2 (FREQUENCY) is selected the FREQUENCY SCALING
(PPH/HZ) pages appear. See FIGURE 4-294A FREQUENCY
SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-294C FREQUEN-
CY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3. Select appropriate manufacturer
and scaling by using the D or U Keys to place the option in the cur-
sor field and then press ENTER.
NOTE:
LEAR stands for J.E.T. fuel flow manufacturer and
AERO is AERO Systems.

FIGURE 4-294A FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-142


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-294B FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-294C FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3

(c) If Option 3 (PULSE WIDTH) is selected the PULSE WIDTH SCAL-


ING (PPH/MS) pages will appear. See FIGURE 4-295A PULSE
WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-295C
PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3. Use the D or U Keys
to place the appropriate manufacturer/scaling in the cursor field and
then press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-295A PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-143


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-295B PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-295C PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3

(d) If Option 4 (DC AMPLITUDE) is selected the DC AMPLITUDE


SCALING (PPH/V) pages are displayed. See FIGURE 4-296A DC
AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-296I
DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT PAGE. Use the D or U Keys to
place the appropriate manufacturer/scaling in the cursor field and
then press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-296A DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-144


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-296B DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-296C DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 3

FIGURE 4-296D DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 4

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-145


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-296E DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 5

FIGURE 4-296F DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 6

FIGURE 4-296G DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 7

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-146


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-296H DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8

(1) If the USER ENTERED option is selected (FIGURE 4-296H


DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8), the page
shown in FIGURE 4-296I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT
PAGE will be displayed.

FIGURE 4-296I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT PAGE

(2) Type in any whole number value of fuel flow scaling.


(e) If Option 5 (AC AMPLITUDE) is selected, FIGURE 4-297 AC AM-
PLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE will appear. Use the D or U
Keys to place the desired option in the cursor field and press EN-
TER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-147


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-297 AC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE

(f) If Option 6 (DC COMP. FREQ) is selected, FIGURE 4-298 DC


COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE is displayed. Use
the D or U Keys to place the desired option in the cursor field and
press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-298 DC COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE

(g) FIGURE 4-299 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE is now displayed. Select


the number that corresponds to number of engines on the aircraft
and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-299 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-148


J GNS-XLS

NOTE:
The number of engines vary per selected fuel flow in-
terface.

V. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION Page


FIGURE 4-300 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE is now displayed. If the
radio tuning configuration has been previously defined it will be present on this
page. If this configuration is acceptable, press ENTER and go to Step 4.4.2. W.
The NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page. If changing or entering a new configuration, press
the D Key to obtain the options list.

FIGURE 4-300 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE

1. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION pages listing the available


options is now displayed. See FIGURE 4-301A RADIO TUNING
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-301E
RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 5. Using the
D (Down) or the U (Up) Keys to scroll through the options. When
the desired option is in the cursor field and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-301A RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 1

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-149


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-301B RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-301C RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 3

FIGURE 4-301D RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 4

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-150


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-301E RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 5

(a) If Option 1, 8, 9, 11, or 12 is selected, system will go to Step 4.4.2.


W. The NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page.
(b) If Options 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, or 13 is selected, FIGURE 4-302 AUTO-
TUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE PAGE will be displayed. Select the
desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-302 AUTOTUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE PAGE

(1) Select appropriate electrical input to control AUTOTUNE


DISABLE and press ENTER. See FIGURE 4-303 AUTO-
TUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF: or FIGURE 4-304 AU-
TOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF:.

FIGURE 4-303 AUTOTUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF:

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-151


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-304 AUTOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF:

(c) If Option 7 is selected, FIGURE 4-305 VOR BEARING PAGE will be


displayed. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-305 VOR BEARING PAGE

W. The NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page


FIGURE 4-306 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-306 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-152


J GNS-XLS

X. FIGURE 4-307A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER. If Options 7, 8, or 9 were selected on the RADIO TUN-
ING CONFIGURATION page, go to Step 4.4.2. GG. The MAX HOLDING IAS
THROUGH 14.000 FT: Page from this point. If Option 11 or 12 was selected, pro-
ceed to next step. If any other option was selected, proceed to Step 4.4.2. Y. The
COMM 1 INSTALLED? Page.

FIGURE 4-307A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

1. If Option 2 or 3 is selected on the NAV 2 INSTALLED? page, the


page displayed in FIGURE 4-307B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS
PAGE will be displayed. Select the appropriate option.

FIGURE 4-307B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS PAGE

Y. The COMM 1 INSTALLED? Page


FIGURE 4-308 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-153


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-308 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

Z. FIGURE 4-309 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-309 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

AA. FIGURE 4-310 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-310 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-154


J GNS-XLS

BB. FIGURE 4-311 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-311 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE

CC. FIGURE 4-312 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the de-
sired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-312 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

DD. FIGURE 4-313 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-313 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-155


J GNS-XLS

EE. FIGURE 4-314 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-314 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

FF. FIGURE 4-315 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-315 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

GG. The MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT: Page


FIGURE 4-316 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT. PAGE is now dis-
played. Refer to Airman's Information Manual (AIM) for specific aircraft type and
applicable parameter. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-316 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT. PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-156


J GNS-XLS

NOTE:
The default selection of 230 is for Civil Turbojet.

HH. FIGURE 4-317 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT. PAGE is now displayed.
Refer to Airman's Information Manual (AIM) for specific aircraft type and applicable
parameter. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-317 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT. PAGE

II. FIGURE 4-318A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE is now displayed. The FMS uses a
default bank angle limit of 30 degrees for roll steering. this bank angle limit can be
changed so as the aircraft altitude increases the limit angles are reduced incremen-
tally at a rate of 1 degree per 1,000 feet.

FIGURE 4-318A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE

1. If Option 1 (DEFAULT) is selected, there will be no roll limiting


through the FMS when the ENTER key is depressed. Proceed to
Step 4.4.2. JJ. The ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR Page.
2. Select Option 2 (VARIABLE) to change the bank angle limits. When
ENTER is pressed, FIGURE 4-318B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMIT-
ING PAGE will appear with the cursor over the Flight Level (FL)
field showing a default value of 14.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-157


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-318B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMITING PAGE

3. Enter any whole number value from 14 to 22. This is the altitude at
which the bank angle will begin. Press ENTER and the cursor will
move to the High Altitude Roll Limit field as shown in FIGURE 4-
318C HIGH ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE.

FIGURE 4-318C HIGH ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE

4. Enter any whole number value from 15 to 25. After the value is en-
tered, the system will automatically calculate the altitude at which
the bank angle reduction will be complete. The system will reduce
the maximum bank angle in increments from 30 degrees at the Be-
gin Limiting Altitude at a rate of one degree per 1,000 feet until the
High Altitude Roll Limit is reached.
JJ. The ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR Page
FIGURE 4-319 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE is now displayed. If Op-
tion 1 (DEFAULT) is selected, the recommended default gains used to compute the
roll steering commands will be used. Select Option 2 to increase the default gains
by a factor of 1.5. Select Option 3 to increase the default gains by a factor of 2.0.
NOTE:
In some installations an increase in the roll steering
gains may improve the lateral tracking performance
of the system.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-158


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-319 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE

CAUTION:
THE DEFAULT ROLL STEERING GAINS REP-
RESENT A COMPROMISE IN RIDE COM-
FORT AND TRACKING PERFORMANCE. IT
IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE DEFAULT
ROLL STEERING GAINS BE USED UNLESS
FLIGHT TEST DATA INDICATES THAT THE
LATERAL TRACKING PERFORMANCE MAY
BE IMPROVED BY INCREASED ROLL
STEERING GAINS. INCREASING THE GAINS
IN SOME INSTALLATIONS MAY DEGRADE
THE TRACKING PERFORMANCE OF THE
SYSTEM.
KK. FIGURE 4-319A SEARCH AND RESCUE PAGE is now displayed. If SEARCH
AND RESCUE is allowed in flight planning selections, select Option 2 ENABLED.

FIGURE 4-319A SEARCH AND RESCUE PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-159


J GNS-XLS

LL. If SEARCH AND RESCUE is enabled, FIGURE 4-319B EXTERNAL WAYPOINT


PAGE will appear. Select Option 1 EXTERNAL for external waypoints to be han-
dled normally (DIRECT TO EXTERNAL WAYPOINT). Select Option 2 TARGET
for external waypoints to be handled as TARGET waypoints (T001 in FPL 56).

FIGURE 4-319B EXTERNAL WAYPOINT PAGE

MM. If SEARCH AND RESCUE is enabled, FIGURE 4-319C DATUM PLAN PAGE will
appear, This page allows the TOKYO DATUM calculation page in the PLAN sec-
tion of the FMS. If the TOKYO DATUM page is to appear select Option 2 EN-
ABLED. The TOKYO DATUM page converts latitudes and longitudes from WGS-
84 to TOKYO DATUMS.

FIGURE 4-319C DATUM PLAN PAGE

NN. FIGURE 4-319D EGPWS TERRAIN DISPLAY ON FMS PAGE is now displayed.
This page enables the display of TERRAIN data on the GNS-XLS. Contact a cus-
tomer representative to determine EGPWS compatible sources of TERRAIN data.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-160


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-319D EGPWS TERRAIN DISPLAY ON FMS PAGE

OO. FIGURE 4-320 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect YES or NO then press ENTER. System Configuration is now complete.

FIGURE 4-320 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE

4.4.3 CONCENTRATED DATA BUS INSTALLED (DISCRETE WOG)


A. FIGURE 4-321 THIS FMS IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the option desired.
Press ENTER to continue to the next step.

FIGURE 4-321 THIS FMS IS: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-161


J GNS-XLS

B. The POSITION UNIT #1 IS: Page


FIGURE 4-322 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the option
desired. Press ENTER to continue to the next step. If option 1 is selected indicat-
ing position unit #1 is not used, the page for position unit #2 will appear next. Pro-
ceed to Step 4.4.3. C. The POSITION UNIT #2 IS: Page.

FIGURE 4-322 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE

1. If Option 2 (ARINC 743 GPS) is selected, FIGURE 4-323 POSI-


TION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE will appear. Select the
proper port option. Press ENTER to continue to the next step.

FIGURE 4-323 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE

(a) FIGURE 4-324 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the proper external GPS option. Press ENTER to go to the next
step.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-162


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-324 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE

NOTE:
GPS #1 and GPS #2 are for GPS sensors external
to the GNS-XLS. The internal GPS receiver is not an
option on this screen.

2. If Option 3 (ARINC 704 IRS) is selected, FIGURE 4-325 POSITION


UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE will appear. Select the proper
port option. Press ENTER to continue to the next step.

FIGURE 4-325 POSITION UNIT #1 IS CONNECTED TO: PAGE

(a) FIGURE 4-326 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE will appear. Select
the proper option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-163


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-326 POSITION UNIT #1 IS: PAGE

3. If Option 4 (ARINC 571 INS) is selected, press ENTER.


C. The POSITION UNIT #2 IS: Page
FIGURE 4-327 POSITION UNIT #2 IS: PAGE is now displayed. Repeat Step
4.4.3. B. The POSITION UNIT #1 IS: Page for each applicable option and any fur-
ther Position Unit pages that may appear. Proceed to the next step.

FIGURE 4-327 POSITION UNIT #2 IS: PAGE

D. FIGURE 4-328 DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE is now displayed. See . ARINC 429 or
575 may be selected at this point.

FIGURE 4-328 DIGITAL TYPE IS: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-164


J GNS-XLS

E. FIGURE 4-329 WEIGHT ON GEAR PAGE is now displayed. Select the de-
sired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.
NOTE:
ACTIVE HI signifies ground in the air. ACTIVE LOW
signifies ground on the ground.

FIGURE 4-329 WEIGHT ON GEAR PAGE

F. FIGURE 4-330 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-330 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA SET PAGE

G. FIGURE 4-331 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-165


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-331 GAMA ARINC 429 BUS DATA RATE PAGE

H. FIGURE 4-332 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE is now displayed. Select


the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-332 ANALOG VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE

I. FIGURE 4-333 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-333 A 561 DIST. OUTP. PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-166


J GNS-XLS

J. FIGURE 4-334 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-334 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE

K. FIGURE 4-335 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-335 ARINC WPT. OUTPUT PAGE

L. FIGURE 4-336 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-336 EFIS HSI WARN PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-167


J GNS-XLS

M. FIGURE 4-337A EFIS DME ARC STYLE PAGE is now displayed. Three options
appear as follows:

FIGURE 4-337A EFIS DME ARC STYLE PAGE

1. ARC AS GAP - When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the waypoints
along the arc have the GAP bit set and no waypoints or line seg-
ments are displayed along the arc.
2. ARC TO ON ARC - When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the way-
points along the arc are displayed along the arc and the TO way-
point moves along with each waypoint.
3. ARC TO AT END - When the aircraft is flying a DME arc, the way-
points along the arc are displayed along the arc and the TO way-
point is the waypoint at the end of the arc.
N. FIGURE 4-337B DME ARC STYLE PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired op-
tion. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-337B DME ARC STYLE PAGE

1. SEGMENTED ARC - The aircraft will fly discrete arc segments, re-
turning to wings level once established on the segment.
2. CURVED ARC PATH - The aircraft will hold a constant bank angle
around the arc.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-168


J GNS-XLS

O. FIGURE 4-338 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE is now dis-
played. Select the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-338 HSI COURSE OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE

P. FIGURE 4-339 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the
desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-339 HSI COURSE INTERFACE IS: PAGE

Q. FIGURE 4-340 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-340 HSI BRG OUTPUT IS RELATIVE TO: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-169


J GNS-XLS

R. FIGURE 4-341 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select
the desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-341 HSI BRG OUTPUT OFFSET IS: PAGE

S. FIGURE 4-342 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-342 BEARING DISPLAYS PAGE

T. FIGURE 4-343 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS: PAGE is now displayed. Select the
desired option. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-343 HSI BEARING INTERFACE IS: PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-170


J GNS-XLS

U. FIGURE 4-344 SIMULATOR MODE PAGE is now displayed. Select the Option 1
when configuring the aircraft. Press ENTER to go to the next step.

FIGURE 4-344 SIMULATOR MODE PAGE

CAUTION:
PLACING THE SYSTEM IN SIMULATOR
MODE IS NOT RECOMMENDED UNLESS
THE SYSTEM IS USED FOR DISPLAY PUR-
POSES ONLY. IF THE AIRCRAFT IS BEING
CHECKED OUT OR CONFIGURED FOR
FLIGHT, SELECT OPTION 1 (NOT SIMULA-
TOR) AND PRESS ENTER.
V. FIGURE 4-345 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE is now dis-
played. If configuration has been previously defined, it will be displayed on this
page. If this configuration is correct, press ENTER and proceed to Step 4.4.3. W.
The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION Page. When entering a new configuration
press the D Key to obtain the FUEL FLOW INTERFACE page.

FIGURE 4-345 FUEL FLOW SENSOR CONFIGURATION PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-171


J GNS-XLS

1. The FUEL FLOW INTERFACE page is now displayed. See FIG-


URE 4-346A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1 and FIGURE 4-
346B FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2. Using the D (Down) or
the U (Up) Keys to scroll through the options. When the desired op-
tion is in the cursor field, press ENTER to obtain the appropriate set
of scaling pages.

FIGURE 4-346A FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-346B FUEL FLOW INTERFACE PAGE 2

(a) If Option 1 (NO SENSORS) is selected system will go to Step 4.4.3.


W. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION Page.
(b) If Option 2 (FREQUENCY) is selected, the FREQUENCY SCALING
(PPH/HZ) pages appear. See FIGURE 4-347A FREQUENCY
SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-347C FREQUEN-
CY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3. Select appropriate manufacturer
and scaling by using the D or U Keys to place the option in the cur-
sor field and then press ENTER.
NOTE:
LEAR stands for J.E.T. fuel flow manufacturer and
AERO is AERO Systems.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-172


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-347A FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-347B FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-347C FREQUENCY SCALING (PPH/HZ) PAGE 3

(c) If Option 3 (PULSE WIDTH) is selected the PULSE WIDTH SCAL-


ING (PPH/MS) pages will appear. See FIGURE 4-348A PULSE
WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-348C
PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3. Use the D or U Keys
to place the appropriate manufacturer/scaling in the cursor field and
then press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-173


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-348A PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-348B PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-348C PULSE WIDTH SCALING (PPH/MS) PAGE 3

(d) If Option 4 (DC AMPLITUDE) is selected the DC AMPLITUDE


SCALING (PPH/V) pages are displayed. See FIGURE 4-349A DC
AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-349I
DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT PAGE. Use the D or U Keys to
place the appropriate manufacturer/scaling in the cursor field and
then press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-174


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-349A DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-349B DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-349C DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 3

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-175


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-349D DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 4

FIGURE 4-349E DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 5

FIGURE 4-349F DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 6

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-176


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-349G DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 7

FIGURE 4-349H DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8

(1) If the USER ENTERED option is selected (FIGURE 4-349H


DC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE 8) the page
shown in FIGURE 4-349I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT
PAGE will be displayed.

FIGURE 4-349I DC AMPLITUDE LBS/HR/VOLT PAGE

(2) Type in any whole number value of fuel flow scaling.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-177


J GNS-XLS

(e) If Option 5 (AC AMPLITUDE) is selected, FIGURE 4-350 AC AM-


PLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE will appear. Use the D or U
Keys to place the desired option in the cursor field and press EN-
TER.

FIGURE 4-350 AC AMPLITUDE SCALING (PPH/V) PAGE

(f) If Option 6 (DC COMP. FREQ) is selected, FIGURE 4-351 DC


COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE is displayed. Use
the D or U Keys to place the desired option in the cursor field and
press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-351 DC COMP. FREQ. SCALING (PPH/HZ. /V) PAGE

(g) FIGURE 4-352 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE is now displayed. Select


the number that corresponds to number of engines on the aircraft
and press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-178


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-352 NO. OF ENGINES PAGE

NOTE:
The number of engines vary per selected fuel flow in-
terface.

W. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION Page


FIGURE 4-353 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE is now displayed. If the
radio tuning configuration has been previously defined it will be present on this
page. If this configuration is acceptable, press ENTER and go to Step 4.4.3. X. The
NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page. If changing or entering a new configuration, press the
D Key to obtain the options list.

FIGURE 4-353 RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION PAGE

1. The RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION pages listing the available


options is now displayed. See FIGURE 4-354A RADIO TUNING
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 1 through FIGURE 4-354E
RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 5. Using the
D (Down) or the U (Up) Keys to scroll through the options. When
the desired option is in the cursor field and press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-179


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-354A RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 1

FIGURE 4-354B RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 2

FIGURE 4-354C RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 3

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-180


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-354D RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 4

FIGURE 4-354E RADIO TUNING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS PAGE 5

(a) If Option 1, 8, 9, 11, or 12 is selected, the system will go to Step


4.4.3. X. The NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page.
(b) If Options 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, or 13 is selected, FIGURE 4-355 AUTO-
TUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE PAGE will be displayed. Select the
desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-355 AUTOTUNE DISABLE SIGNAL TYPE PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-181


J GNS-XLS

(1) Select appropriate electrical input to control AUTOTUNE


DISABLE and press ENTER. See FIGURE 4-356 AUTO-
TUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF: PAGE or FIGURE 4-
357 AUTOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF: PAGE.

FIGURE 4-356 AUTOTUNE DISABLE VOR SELECTED IF: PAGE

FIGURE 4-357 AUTOTUNE DISABLE LNAV SELECTED IF: PAGE

(c) If Option 7 is selected, FIGURE 4-358 VOR BEARING PAGE will be


displayed. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-358 VOR BEARING PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-182


J GNS-XLS

X. The NAV 1 INSTALLED? Page


FIGURE 4-359 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-359 NAV 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

Y. FIGURE 4-360A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER. If Options 7, 8, or 9 were selected on the RADIO TUN-
ING CONFIGURATION page, go to Step 4.4.3. HH. The MAX HOLDING IAS
THROUGH 14.000 FT: Page from this point. If Option 11 or 12 was selected, pro-
ceed to next step. If any other option was selected, proceed to Step 4.4.3. Z. The
COMM 1 INSTALLED? Page.

FIGURE 4-360A NAV 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

1. If Option 2 or 3 is selected on the NAV 2 INSTALLED? page, the


page displayed in FIGURE 4-360B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS
PAGE will be displayed. Select the appropriate option.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-183


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-360B SIDE 2 VOR CONTROLS PAGE

Z. The COMM 1 INSTALLED? Page


FIGURE 4-361 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-361 COMM 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

AA FIGURE 4-362 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-362 COMM 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-184


J GNS-XLS

BB. FIGURE 4-363 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-363 COMM TUNE CURSOR POSITION PAGE

CC. FIGURE 4-364 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-364 COMM 3 INSTALLED? PAGE

DD. FIGURE 4-365 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the de-
sired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-365 XPNDR 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-185


J GNS-XLS

EE. FIGURE 4-366 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the de-
sired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-366 XPNDR 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

FF. FIGURE 4-367 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-367 ADF 1 INSTALLED? PAGE

GG. FIGURE 4-368 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE is now displayed. Select the desired
option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-368 ADF 2 INSTALLED? PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-186


J GNS-XLS

HH. The MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT: Page


FIGURE 4-369 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT. PAGE is now dis-
played. Refer to Airman's Information Manual (AIM) for specific aircraft type and
applicable parameter. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-369 MAX HOLDING IAS THROUGH 14.000 FT. PAGE

II. FIGURE 4-370 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT. PAGE is now displayed.
Refer to Airman's Information Manual (AIM) for specific aircraft type and applicable
parameter. Select the desired option and press ENTER.

FIGURE 4-370 MAX HOLDING IAS ABOVE 14.000 FT. PAGE

NOTE:
The default selection of 230 is for Civil Turbojet.

JJ. FIGURE 4-371A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE is now displayed. The FMS uses a
default bank angle limit of 30 degrees for roll steering. this bank angle limit can be
changed so as the aircraft altitude increases the limit angles are reduced incremen-
tally at a rate of 1 degree per 1,000 feet.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-187


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-371A BANK ANGLE LIMITS PAGE

1. If Option 1 (DEFAULT) is selected, there will be no roll limiting


through the FMS when the ENTER key is depressed. Proceed to
Step 4.4.3. KK. The ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR Page.
2. Select Option 2 (VARIABLE) to change the bank angle limits. When
ENTER is pressed, FIGURE 4-371B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMIT-
ING PAGE will appear with the cursor over the Flight Level (FL) field
showing a default value of 14.

FIGURE 4-371B ALT TO BEGIN ROLL LIMITING PAGE

3. Enter any whole number value from 14 to 22. This is the altitude at
which the bank angle will begin. Press ENTER and the cursor will
move to the High Altitude Roll Limit field as shown in FIGURE 4-
371C HIGH ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-188


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-371C HIGH ALT ROLL LIMIT PAGE

4. Enter any whole number value from 15 to 25. After the value is en-
tered, the system will automatically calculate the altitude at which
the bank angle reduction will be complete. The system will reduce
the maximum bank angle in increments from 30 degrees at the Be-
gin Limiting Altitude at a rate of one degree per 1,000 feet until the
High Altitude Roll Limit is reached.
KK. The ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR Page
FIGURE 4-372 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE is now displayed. If Op-
tion 1 (DEFAULT) is selected, the recommended default gains used to compute the
roll steering commands will be used. Select Option 2 to increase the default gains
by a factor of 1.5. Select Option 3 to increase the default gains by a factor of 2.0.
NOTE:
In some installations an increase in the roll steering
gains may improve the lateral tracking performance
of the system.

FIGURE 4-372 ROLL STEERING GAIN FACTOR PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-189


J GNS-XLS

CAUTION:
THE DEFAULT ROLL STEERING GAINS REP-
RESENT A COMPROMISE IN RIDE COM-
FORT AND TRACKING PERFORMANCE. IT
IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE DEFAULT
ROLL STEERING GAINS BE USED UNLESS
FLIGHT TEST DATA INDICATES THAT THE
LATERAL TRACKING PERFORMANCE MAY
BE IMPROVED BY INCREASED ROLL
STEERING GAINS. INCREASING THE GAINS
IN SOME INSTALLATIONS MAY DEGRADE
THE TRACKING PERFORMANCE OF THE
SYSTEM.
LL. FIGURE 4-372A SEARCH AND RESCUE PAGE is now displayed. If SEARCH
AND RESCUE is allowed in flight planning selections, select Option 2 ENABLED.

FIGURE 4-372A SEARCH AND RESCUE PAGE

MM. If SEARCH AND RESCUE is enabled, FIGURE 4-372B EXTERNAL WAYPOINT


PAGE will appear. Select Option 1 EXTERNAL for external waypoints to be han-
dled normally (DIRECT TO EXTERNAL WAYPOINT). Select Option 2 TARGET
for external waypoints to be handled as TARGET waypoints (T001 in FPL 56).

FIGURE 4-372B EXTERNAL WAYPOINT PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-190


J GNS-XLS

NN If SEARCH AND RESCUE is enabled, FIGURE 4-372C DATUM PLAN PAGE will
appear. This page allows the TOKYO DATUM calculation page in the PLAN sec-
tion of the FMS. If the TOKYO DATUM page is to appear select Option 2 EN-
ABLED. The TOKYO DATUM page converts latitudes and longitudes from WGS-
84 to TOKYO DATUMS.

FIGURE 4-372C DATUM PLAN PAGE

OO. FIGURE 4-372D EGPWS TERRAIN DISPLAY ON FMS PAGE is now displayed.
This page enables the display of TERRAIN data on the GNS-XLS. Contact a cus-
tomer representative to determine EGPWS compatible sources of TERRAIN data.

FIGURE 4-372D EGPWS TERRAIN DISPLAY ON FMS PAGE

PP FIGURE 4-373 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE is now displayed. Se-
lect YES or NO then press ENTER. System Configuration is now complete.

FIGURE 4-373 WRITE CONFIG. DATA TO MODULE PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-191


J GNS-XLS

4.5 POST INSTALLATION CHECKOUT PROCEDURE


Prior to performing this procedure the system must be installed and configured to the actual air-
craft per Section 4.2 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE (-0101, -0102) or Section 4.4 CONFIGU-
RATION PROCEDURE (-0203).
4.5.1 SET-UP
A. Turn system on.
B. The SELF TEST page is displayed as the system performs a self test. See FIG-
URE 4-374 SELF TEST PAGE. When the test is successful, the INITIALIZATION
page will appear.

FIGURE 4-374 SELF TEST PAGE

C. If the Line Select Keys do not align with the line select prompts on the screen, de-
press the BRT Key (if the screen begins to dim, release the BRT Key then depress
again and hold while momentarily pressing the Direct To Key, then the P Key). Us-
ing the U (Up) or D (Down) Key, adjust the display to the desired alignment. See
FIGURE 4-375 INITIALIZATION PAGE. Depress any key when alignment is com-
plete.

FIGURE 4-375 INITIALIZATION PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-192


J GNS-XLS

D. On the INITIALIZATION page, insert 357777 in the DATE field and press ENTER,
see FIGURE 4-376 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE. FIGURE 4-377 INSTALLATION
TEST PAGE is now displayed.

FIGURE 4-376 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE

4.5.2 TESTING DISPLAY INPUTS


If any of the following steps do not meet specifications, first check the appropriate configuration
steps. If the problem still exists, check the wiring according to SECTION III SYSTEM PLANNING
of this manual. If the problem persists, check the source for adherence to manufacturer's speci-
fications. For example, if the altitude displayed on the ALTITUDE page is incorrect, check the con-
figuration module according to the appropriate steps in SECTION IV POST INSTALLATION CON-
FIGURATION AND CHECK OUT. Next, check the aircraft wiring between the altitude source and
the CDU. See SECTION III SYSTEM PLANNING for wiring information. If still incorrect, check
altitude source and, if necessary, perform maintenance per manufacturer's recommendations and
repeat appropriate steps in this section.
A. Select Option 2, Display Inputs, see FIGURE 4-377 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE.
Press the ENTER Key.

FIGURE 4-377 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-193


J GNS-XLS

B. FIGURE 4-378 ALTITUDE PAGE will be displayed If the static system is pumped
up and an altitude value is present, the altitude value should be observed. The al-
titude value should be within +10 feet of the source. Press ENTER to go to the next
test.

FIGURE 4-378 ALTITUDE PAGE

C. FIGURE 4-379 ALTITUDE RATE PAGE will be displayed. The Altitude Rate value
trend should be observed and should be within 100 ft/min of the source. Press EN-
TER to go to the next test.

FIGURE 4-379 ALTITUDE RATE PAGE

D. FIGURE 4-380 ALTITUDE PRESELECT PAGE will be displayed. The Altitude


Preselect value should be within 200 feet of source. Press ENTER to go to the next
test.

FIGURE 4-380 ALTITUDE PRESELECT PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-194


J GNS-XLS

E. FIGURE 4-381 ALTITUDE PRESELECT ERROR PAGE will be displayed. If the


system was programmed for digital Altitude Preselect, NO SOURCE will be dis-
played. Press ENTER to go to the next test. Otherwise, the Altitude Preselect Er-
ror value should be displayed and be within 200 ft/min of the source. Press ENTER
to go to the next test.

FIGURE 4-381 ALTITUDE PRESELECT ERROR PAGE

F. FIGURE 4-382 TRUE AIRSPEED PAGE will be displayed. If the pitot static system
is pumped up and TAS valid is present, the TAS value should be displayed and be
within +4 knots of the source. Press ENTER to go to the next test.

FIGURE 4-382 TRUE AIRSPEED PAGE

G. One of three pages will appear. If compass heading was selected as not used dur-
ing configuration, FIGURE 4-383 NO HEADING PAGE will appear. If SYNCHRO
was selected, FIGURE 4-384 SYNCHRO HEADING PAGE will appear. If ARINC
429 AHRS was selected, FIGURE 4-385 AR429 AHRS HEADING PAGE will ap-
pear.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-195


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-383 NO HEADING PAGE

FIGURE 4-384 SYNCHRO HEADING PAGE

FIGURE 4-385 AR429 AHRS HEADING PAGE

For SYNCHRO or ARINC 429 AHRS, slew compass and verify that compass val-
ues and those shown on HEADING page are within 1 degree of the compass read-
ing. Press ENTER to go to the next test.
NOTE:
When slewing compass VALID may be present and
INVALID may be displayed momentarily.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-196


J GNS-XLS

H. The WEIGHT ON GEAR page will be displayed. This page indicates current input
to the system and logic as configured in SECTION III SYSTEM PLANNING. See
FIGURE 4-386 WEIGHT ON GEAR PAGE. Press ENTER to go to the next test.

FIGURE 4-386 WEIGHT ON GEAR PAGE

I. FIGURE 4-387 ALTITUDE PRESELECT ERROR VALID PAGE is displayed. If the


system was configured for digital Altitude Preselect, NO SOURCE will be dis-
played. HIGH indicates valid and LOW indicates invalid. Press ENTER to go to
the next test.

FIGURE 4-387 ALTITUDE PRESELECT ERROR VALID PAGE

J. FIGURE 4-388 SPARE DISCRETES IN PAGE is displayed. These are currently


unused. Press ENTER to go to the next page.

FIGURE 4-388 SPARE DISCRETES IN PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-197


J GNS-XLS

K. FIGURE 4-389 DISCRETES LOW PAGE, FIGURE 4-390 DISCRETES HI PAGE,


and FIGURE 4-391 DISCRETES OTHER PAGE show the states of various dis-
cretes. These pages can be used to verify system configuration and aircraft wiring
of the applicable discretes.

FIGURE 4-389 DISCRETES LOW PAGE

FIGURE 4-390 DISCRETES HI PAGE

FIGURE 4-391 DISCRETES OTHER PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-198


J GNS-XLS

4.5.3 TESTING OUTPUTS


The majority of these tests apply to analog interfaces and may not apply to digital outputs.
A. Return to the INSTALLATION TEST page.
B. Select Option 3 (STIM. OUTPUTS) and press ENTER. See FIGURE 4-392 IN-
STALLATION TEST PAGE. The HSI BEARING page will appear. See FIGURE
4-393 HSI BEARING PAGE.

FIGURE 4-392 INSTALLATION TEST PAGE

FIGURE 4-393 HSI BEARING PAGE

1. Verify operation of HSI bearing as follows:


(a) Insert a bearing on HSI BEARING page (no cursor will appear on
the page).
(b) Press the D (Down) or U (Up) key to insert a slew rate in SLEW
RATE field and verify that the bearing on the aircraft equipment and
that shown on the page agree. Press ENTER to go to the next test.
C. FIGURE 4-394 HSI COURSE PAGE will appear.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-199


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-394 HSI COURSE PAGE

1. Verify operation of HSI Course as follows:


(a) Insert a course on HSI COURSE page (no cursor will appear on the
page).
(b) Press the D (Down) or U (Up) key to insert a slew rate in SLEW
RATE field and verify that the course on the aircraft equipment and
that shown on the page agree. Press ENTER to go to the next test.
D. FIGURE 4-395 VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE will appear. Verify that the vertical
deviation is properly indicated. Any value may be inserted up to +999 feet maxi-
mum. Press ENTER to go to the next test.

FIGURE 4-395 VERTICAL DEVIATION PAGE

NOTE:
Vertical Deviation scaling is 1000 feet full scale for
this test.

E. FIGURE 4-396 CROSS TRACK DEV. PAGE will be displayed. Verify that the
crosstrack deviation is properly indicated. Any value may be inserted up to
5.0 nmi maximum. Press ENTER to go to the next test.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-200


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-396 CROSS TRACK DEV. PAGE

NOTE:
The analog Cross Track scaling is set for 7.5 nmi full
scale for this test. During navigation, the full scale
deflection will be 5.0 nmi 1.0 nmi, or 0.3 nmi depend-
ing on the phase of flight.

F. FIGURE 4-397 ROLL STEERING PAGE will appear. Verify proper operation of roll
command steering output. Insert a bank angle of left 30 degrees maximum. In-
crease or decrease bank angle values. Verify that the autopilot follows the steering
command. Press ENTER to go to the next test.

FIGURE 4-397 ROLL STEERING PAGE

G. FIGURE 4-398 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE will appear. Insert a distance value in
the DIST. field and verify that distance is displayed on the HSI. Press ENTER to
go to the next test.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-201


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-398 ARINC 561 OUTPUT PAGE

NOTE:
The scaling for the output as programmed in the con-
figuration module is noted at the bottom of the page.

H. FIGURE 4-399 ARINC 571 OUTPUT PAGE will be displayed. Insert a ground
speed value in the GS field and verify that the aircraft equipment has ground
speed displayed. Press ENTER to go to the next test.

FIGURE 4-399 ARINC 571 OUTPUT PAGE

I. FIGURE 4-400 SYSTEM VALID FLAG PAGE is now displayed. Verify that press-
ing 1 displays ON and pressing 2 displays OFF. Press ENTER to go to the next
test.

FIGURE 4-400 SYSTEM VALID FLAG PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-202


J GNS-XLS

J. FIGURE 4-401 RADIO TUNE VALID FLAG PAGE is now displayed. Verify that
pressing 1 displays ON and pressing 2 displays OFF. Press ENTER to go to the
next test.

FIGURE 4-401 RADIO TUNE VALID FLAG PAGE

K. FIGURE 4-402 DISTANCE VALID FLAG PAGE is now displayed. Verify that
pressing 1 displays ON and pressing 2 displays OFF. Press ENTER to go to the
next test.

FIGURE 4-402 DISTANCE VALID FLAG PAGE

L. FIGURE 4-403 SELECTED CROSS-TRACK WARN PAGE is now displayed. Ver-


ify that pressing 1 displays ON and the annunciator is valid. Verify that pressing 2
displays OFF and the annunciator is invalid. Press ENTER to go to the next test.

FIGURE 4-403 SELECTED CROSS-TRACK WARN PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-203


J GNS-XLS

M. FIGURE 4-404 REMOTE DR ANNUNCIATOR PAGE is now displayed. Verify that


pressing 1 displays ON and the annunciator is lit. Verify pressing 2 displays OFF
and the annunciator is off. Press ENTER to go to the next test.

FIGURE 4-404 REMOTE DR ANNUNCIATOR PAGE

N. FIGURE 4-405 REMOTE WPT ANNUNCIATOR PAGE is now displayed. Verify


that pressing 1 displays ON and the annunciator is lit. Verify pressing 2 displays
OFF and the annunciator is off. Press ENTER to go to the next test.

FIGURE 4-405 REMOTE WPT ANNUNCIATOR PAGE

O. FIGURE 4-406 REMOTE MESSAGE ANNUNCIATOR PAGE is now displayed.


Verify that pressing 1 displays ON and the annunciator is lit. Verify pressing 2 dis-
plays OFF and the annunciator is off. Press ENTER to go to the next test.

FIGURE 4-406 REMOTE MESSAGE ANNUNCIATOR PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-204


J GNS-XLS

P. FIGURE 4-407 HSI VALID FLAG PAGE is now displayed. Verify that pressing 1
displays ON and pressing 2 displays OFF. Press ENTER to go to the next test.

FIGURE 4-407 HSI VALID FLAG PAGE

Q. FIGURE 4-408 TO/FROM FLAG PAGE is now displayed. Verify that pressing 1
gives a TO indication and pressing 3 gives a FROM indication. Press 2 to display
OFF and press ENTER to go to the next test.

FIGURE 4-408 TO/FROM FLAG PAGE

R. FIGURE 4-409 STEERING VALID FLAG PAGE is now displayed. Verify that
pressing 1 displays ON and pressing 2 displays OFF. Press ENTER to go to the
next test.

FIGURE 4-409 STEERING VALID FLAG PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-205


J GNS-XLS

S. FIGURE 4-410 APPROACH MODE VALID PAGE is now displayed. Verify that
pressing 1 displays ON and annunciator is lit. Verify pressing 2 displays OFF and
the annunciator is off. Press ENTER to go to the next test.

FIGURE 4-410 APPROACH MODE VALID PAGE

T. FIGURE 4-411 VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID PAGE is now displayed. Verify that
pressing 1 displays ON pressing 2 displays OFF and the annunciator is off. Press
ENTER to go to the next test.

FIGURE 4-411 VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID PAGE

NOTE:
Selecting the Vertical Deviation Invalid will re-scale
the vertical deviation to 500 feet full scale.

U. FIGURE 4-412 HEADING MODE VALID PAGE is now displayed. Verify that
pressing 1 displays ON and annunciator is lit. Verify pressing 2 displays OFF and
the annunciator is off. Press ENTER to go to the next test.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-206


J GNS-XLS

FIGURE 4-412 HEADING MODE VALID PAGE

4.5.4 GPS STATUS CHECKOUT


To be assured of proper signal reception, locate the aircraft well away from buildings.
A. Re-initialize the system. The INITIALIZATION page will be displayed after a suc-
cessful self-test. See FIGURE 4-413 INITIALIZATION PAGE.

FIGURE 4-413 INITIALIZATION PAGE

B. Verify that DATE and GMT are correct. If not, use the LINE SELECT Keys to move
cursor over DATE field.
NOTE:
The correct DATE, TIME, and POSITION is required
in order to track the appropriate satellites.

C. To enter a new date make numerical entry from keyboard in order of day-month-
year and press ENTER Key (for example, 5 Feb 1995 would be entered as
050295).
D. Observe that the cursor is over the GMT field after the date was entered. If the GMT
is correct, press ENTER. If the GMT requires updating, update GMT in order of
hours then minutes and press ENTER.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-207


J GNS-XLS

NOTE:
The computer is unable to distinguish a correct date
or GMT from an incorrect one within the permissible
range. The computer, however, will recognize im-
possible dates and GMTs such as June 42 or 27:00.
The cursor will flash over the erroneous field; type in
the correct information and enter it.

E. Observe that the cursor is over IDENT field. Enter the current aircraft position by
entering the identifier or correct latitude and longitude. Press ENTER.
F. Initialization is now complete. Put the system in primary navigation mode by press-
ing the HOLD Key, and then pressing the ENTER Key twice.
G. Press the NAV Key until NAVIGATION 4/4 page appears. Using the LINE SELECT
Keys, position cursor over GPS and press ENTER. FIGURE 4-414 GPS SUBSEC-
TION 1/3 PAGE is displayed. .

FIGURE 4-414 GPS SUBSECTION 1/3 PAGE

H. Verify that the DIFFERENCE between POS and GPS is within acceptable limits.
I. Press the NXT Key to display the GPS SUBSECTION 3/3 page. See FIGURE 4-
415 GPS SUBSECTION 3/3 PAGE. Verify that almanac data exists. If more than
12 satellites are available, a fourth page will appear when the NXT Key is de-
pressed again. If applicable, verify that almanac data exists on both pages.

FIGURE 4-415 GPS SUBSECTION 3/3 PAGE

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-208


J GNS-XLS

If 3 or 4 satellites are tracked and RAIM is not available, then an altitude entry is
required. Depress the PRV Key to display FIGURE 4-416 GPS SUBSECTION 2/
3 PAGE. Enter current aircraft altitude. .

FIGURE 4-416 GPS SUBSECTION 2/3 PAGE

J. Repeat Steps 4.5.4.G through 4.5.4.I. to verify the current GPS position. If no sat-
ellites are tracked on GPS SUBSECTION 3/3 page, the GPS sensor is not receiv-
ing the satellite signal. Check the connectors and cabling between the CDU and
the GPS antenna.
4.5.5 GPS INTERFERENCE CHECKOUT
A. Press the NXT Key to display the FIGURE 4-417 GPS SUBSECTION 3/3 PAGE.

FIGURE 4-417 GPS SUBSECTION 3/3 PAGE

B. Select a frequency of 121.15 MHz on COMM 1. Transmit for a period of at least


20 seconds. Verify that no satellites with an elevation greater than 255 displays an
N in the track (T) column.
C. Repeat Step 4.5.5.B using 121.175, 121.20, 131.250, 131.275, and 131.30 MHz.
D. Repeat Steps 4.5.5.B and 4.5.5.C for each COMM installed in the aircraft.
E. If any of the above actions causes interference in tracking a satellite, it is necessary
to identify the source of the interference. There are two common sources:

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-209


J GNS-XLS

1. The 12th and 13th harmonics of the frequencies tested above can
be radiated from the VHF COMM at a level strong enough to cause
interference with the GPS receiver and still be low enough to meet
TSO requirements for the VHF COMM. If this is found to be the
source of the interference, an optional notch filter (Honeywell P/N
071- 01565-0000 or TED Mfg P/N 4-70-54) will need to be installed.
This inline filter should be installed as close to VHF transceiver as
possible.
2. Interference can also be caused by re-radiation from an ELT (Emer-
gency Locator Transmitter). The radiated RF from the VHF COMM
can excite the output tank circuit of the ELT, causing it to oscillate
and radiate RF strong enough to interfere with the GPS receiver. If
disconnecting the ELT antenna eliminates the problem, the ELT
manufacturer should be contacted for a recommended solution.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 4-210


J GNS-XLS

SECTION V
CERTIFICATION
5.0 INTRODUCTION
This section outlines the procedures required to obtain IFR certification for the GNS-XLS. Recom-
mended flight test procedures are also included.
NOTE:
This section contains examples and guidance for air-
craft installation. This does not in any way absolve
the installer from investigating and resolving any is-
sues related to certification on the aircraft. The ma-
terial in this section is for reference only.

5.1 CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE


5.1.1 EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY
Careful consideration must be paid to the electrical characteristics of existing equipment or pos-
sible additions that will be interfaced to the GNS-XLS Flight Management System, in order to en-
sure system compatibility. SECTION III SYSTEM PLANNING of this manual provides system
planning guidelines, and defines the electrical characteristics of the GNS-XLS Flight Management
System. The installing agency should contact Honeywell Product Support, for information regard-
ing the compatibility of equipment not listed in SECTION III SYSTEM PLANNING.
5.1.2 EQUIPMENT LOCATION
The GNS-XLS Flight Management System and associated indicators, annunciators, and switches
should be clearly visible and within easy reach of the pilot. Refer to SECTION II INSTALLATION
of this manual for complete installation information.
5.1.3 FAA REQUIREMENTS
The installing agency should contact a local FAA Inspector (GADO, FSDO, ACDO, MIDO, or
ACO) who will determine whether the installation may be approved by submitting FAA Form 337,
or whether a Supplemental Type Certificate (STC) will be required. If FAA Form 337 is determined
to be sufficient, the installing agency should determine the acceptability of the procedures defined
within this manual. If the FAA Inspector determines that an STC is required, the installing agency
will need to contact the nearest Aircraft Certification Office (ACO), to obtain acceptable proce-
dures.
The FAA Central Region Aircraft Certification Office, Wichita, Kansas, has on file an approved re-
port regarding the GNS-XLS Flight Management System. This report contains the bench test data
and DO-160C environmental test data required to demonstrate the GNS-XLS Flight Management
System's compliance.
5.1.4 Flight Test
VFR or IFR approval will require a flight test to determine that the accuracy requirements, and gen-
eral functional requirements, are met. Flight test procedures are given in this manual.
5.1.5 FAA FORM 337
FAA Form 337 (if applicable) must be completed and submitted to the FAA. A sample checklist
is provided in the Certification Appendix of this manual.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 5-1


J GNS-XLS

5.1.6 FLIGHT MANUAL REVISION


A Flight Manual Supplement is usually required for IFR approval. A sample supplement is provid-
ed in the Flight Manual Supplement Appendix, of this manual. The sample is to be used as a guide
to acceptable content and format, and is not intended to apply to all installations. It is the respon-
sibility of the installing agency to prepare an appropriate Flight Manual Supplement, and obtain
FAA approval.
5.1.7 PILOT BRIEFING
The installing agency should carefully review the Flight Manual Supplement and the GNS-XLS
Flight Management System Operator's Manual, P/N 006-08845-0000, with the owner/operator of
the aircraft.

5.2 FLIGHT TESTS


5.2.1 IFR APPROVAL
Flight testing to gain IFR approval involves several dynamics listed below:
1. Accuracy checks involving five or more over-flights of one or more surveyed posi-
tions. Flight Technical Error (FTE) budget is 1.0 nmi for enroute and terminal op-
erations, .25 nmi for approach operations.
2. Antenna shading checks by maneuvering the aircraft in turns up to 305 of bank for
one minute, in both directions.
3. Verifying proper interfaces by expected function, as well as "failing" circuit breakers
to record effects.
4. Verifying proper flight control system tracking when coupled to the GPS.
5. If seeking IFR approach approval, a minimum of three published approaches, re-
trieved from the database, must be conducted to verify proper operation of equip-
ment.
Reference FAA Advisory Circular AC 20-130A, for further details. Optionally AC20-138 can be
consulted for GPS issues. AC20-129 should be consulted for Aircraft Certification issues related
to Vertical Navigation (VNAV).

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 5-2


J GNS-XLS

SECTION VI
OPERATION
6.0 INTRODUCTION
Refer to SECTION IV POST INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION AND CHECK OUT for the oper-
ating instructions for the post installation checkout.
Refer to the GNS-XLS Flight Management System Operator's Manual, P/N 006-08845-0000, for
complete operating instructions on the GNS-XLS.
Refer to the GNS-XLS. Enhanced Flight Management System Operator's Manual P/N 006-18233-
0000, for complete operating instructions on the GNS-XLS enhanced.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 6-1


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page 6-2


J GNS-XLS

CERTIFICATION APPENDIX

SAMPLE CERTIFICATION CHECKLIST

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page CERT-1


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page CERT-2


J GNS-XLS

SAMPLE CERTIFICATION CHECKLIST


AIRCRAFT MAKE:
AIRCRAFT MODEL:
AIRCRAFT SERIAL NUMBER:
AIRCRAFT REGISTRATION NUMBER:
DATE WORK COMPLETED:
A. Installed the Global GNS-XLS Flight Management System in accordance with unit
Installation Manual number 006-10528-0000, Revision , dated
and has been flight tested in accordance with AC20-129, Appendix 1, paragraph
2d, to verify proper operation and accuracy for a follow-on IFR approval. Original
IFR approval was accomplished by STC SA3778NM, Master Drawing List number
651-017960, Revision 12, dated 02/05/97. The unit was manufactured to perfor-
mance specifications of TSO-C129.
B. Ground and flight tests were conducted and determined that the FMS does not in-
terfere with the normal operation of other equipment installed in the aircraft, and
the FMS equipment is not a source of objectionable electromagnetic interference.
Proper operation and accuracy were verified, and the unit functions properly and
safely in accordance with the manufacturers specifications.
C. The unit was mounted in the instrument panel location for avionics provided by the
manufacturer and is sufficient to ensure the restraint of the equipment when sub-
jected to emergency landing loads.
D. A navigation source annunciator is provided to indicate the primary display is dis-
playing NAV, or FMS. The FMS is coupled to the autopilot when the primary dis-
play is displaying FMS and the autopilot NAV function is selected.
E. Installed an FAA Approved Flight Manual Supplement in the aircraft flight manual,
and a Operator's Manual, number 006-08845-0000, Revision , dated
and a GNS-XLS Quick Reference number 006-08866-0000, Revision ,
dated , in the aircraft. Weight, balance, and equipment list
changes have been made in the aircraft flight manual.

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page CERT-3


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page CERT-4


J GNS-XLS

FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT APPENDIX

SAMPLE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-1


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-2


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-3


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-4


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-5


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-6


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-7


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-8


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-9


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-10


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-11


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-12


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-13


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-14


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-15


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-16


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-17


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-18


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-19


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-20


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-21


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-22


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-23


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-24


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-25


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-26


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-27


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page FMS-28


J GNS-XLS

STC APPENDIX

SUPPLEMENTAL TYPE CERTIFICATE FORMS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page STC-1


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page STC-2


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page STC-3


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page STC-4


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page STC-5


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page STC-6


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page STC-7


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page STC-8


J GNS-XLS

TSO APPENDIX

ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORMS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-1


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-2


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-3


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-4


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-5


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-6


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-7


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-8


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-9


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-10


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-11


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-12


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-13


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-14


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-15


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-16


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-17


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-18


J GNS-XLS

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-19


J GNS-XLS

THIS PAGE IS RESERVED

Revision 9, Nov/2005 10528I09.JA Page TSO-20

You might also like